EVAL-ADF7023DB1Z [ADI]

High Performance, Low Power, ISM Band FSK/GFSK/OOK/MSK/GMSK Transceiver IC;
EVAL-ADF7023DB1Z
型号: EVAL-ADF7023DB1Z
厂家: ADI    ADI
描述:

High Performance, Low Power, ISM Band FSK/GFSK/OOK/MSK/GMSK Transceiver IC

ISM频段
文件: 总112页 (文件大小:1611K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
High Performance, Low Power, ISM Band  
FSK/GFSK/OOK/MSK/GMSK Transceiver IC  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Smart wake mode  
FEATURES  
Current saving low power mode with autonomous receiver  
wake up, carrier sense, and packet reception  
Downloadable firmware modules  
Ultralow power, high performance transceiver  
Frequency bands  
862 MHz to 928 MHz  
Image rejection calibration, fully automated (patent pending)  
128-bit AES encryption/decryption with hardware  
acceleration and key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits, and  
256 bits  
Reed Solomon error correction with hardware acceleration  
240-byte packet buffer for TX/RX data  
Efficient SPI control interface with block read/write access  
Integrated battery alarm and temperature sensor  
Integrated RC and 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator  
On-chip, 8-bit ADC  
431 MHz to 464 MHz  
Data rates supported  
1 kbps to 300 kbps  
2.2 V to 3.6 V power supply  
Single-ended and differential PAs  
Low IF receiver with programmable IF bandwidths  
100 kHz, 150 kHz, 200 kHz, 300 kHz  
Receiver sensitivity (BER)  
−116 dBm at 1.0 kbps, 2FSK, GFSK  
−107.5 dBm at 38.4 kbps, 2FSK, GFSK  
5 mm × 5 mm, 32-pin, LFCSP package  
−102.5 dBm at 150 kbps, GFSK, GMSK  
−100 dBm at 300 kbps, GFSK, GMSK  
−104 dBm at 19.2 kbps, OOK  
APPLICATIONS  
Smart metering  
IEEE 802.15.4g  
Very low power consumption  
12.8 mA in PHY_RX mode (maximum front-end gain)  
24.1 mA in PHY_TX mode (10 dBm output, single-ended PA)  
0.75 µA in PHY_SLEEP mode (32 kHz RC oscillator active)  
1.28 µA in PHY_SLEEP mode (32 kHz XTAL oscillator active)  
0.33 µA in PHY_SLEEP mode (Deep Sleep Mode 1)  
RF output power of −20 dBm to +13.5 dBm (single-ended PA)  
RF output power of −20 dBm to +10 dBm (differential PA)  
Patented fast settling automatic frequency control (AFC)  
Digital received signal strength indication (RSSI)  
Integrated PLL loop filter and Tx/Rx switch  
Fast automatic VCO calibration  
Wireless MBUS  
Home automation  
Process and building control  
Wireless sensor networks (WSNs)  
Wireless healthcare  
Automatic synthesizer bandwidth optimization  
On-chip, low-power, custom 8-bit processor  
Radio control  
Packet management  
Smart wake mode  
Packet management support  
Highly flexible for a wide range of packet formats  
Insertion/detection of preamble/sync word/CRC/address  
Manchester and 8b/10b data encoding and decoding  
Data whitening  
Rev. C  
Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no  
responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other  
rightsof third parties that may result fromits use. Specifications subject to change without notice. No  
license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices.  
Trademarks andregisteredtrademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A.  
Tel: 781.329.4700  
www.analog.com  
Fax: 781.461.3113 ©2010–2012 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Features .............................................................................................. 1  
Interrupts in Sport Mode .......................................................... 53  
ADF7023 Memory Map ................................................................ 54  
BBRAM........................................................................................ 54  
Modem Configuration RAM (MCR) ...................................... 54  
Program ROM ............................................................................ 54  
Program RAM ............................................................................ 54  
Packet RAM ................................................................................ 55  
SPI Interface .................................................................................... 56  
General Characteristics ............................................................. 56  
Command Access....................................................................... 56  
Status Word ................................................................................. 56  
Command Queuing ................................................................... 57  
Memory Access........................................................................... 58  
Low Power Modes .......................................................................... 61  
Example Low Power Modes...................................................... 64  
Low Power Mode Timing Diagrams........................................ 66  
WUC Setup ................................................................................. 67  
Firmware Timer Setup............................................................... 69  
Calibrating the RC Oscillator ................................................... 69  
Downloadable Firmware Modules............................................... 71  
Writing a Module to Program RAM........................................ 71  
Image Rejection Calibration Module ...................................... 71  
Reed Solomon Coding Module................................................ 71  
AES Encryption and Decryption Module............................... 71  
Radio Blocks.................................................................................... 73  
Frequency Synthesizer............................................................... 73  
Crystal Oscillator........................................................................ 74  
Modulation.................................................................................. 74  
RF Output Stage.......................................................................... 74  
PA/LNA Interface....................................................................... 75  
Receive Channel Filter............................................................... 75  
Image Channel Rejection .......................................................... 75  
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)............................................... 75  
RSSI .............................................................................................. 76  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK Demodulation............................... 78  
Clock Recovery........................................................................... 80  
OOK Demodulation .................................................................. 80  
Applications....................................................................................... 1  
Revision History ............................................................................... 3  
Functional Block Diagram .............................................................. 4  
General Description ......................................................................... 4  
Specifications..................................................................................... 6  
RF and Synthesizer Specifications.............................................. 6  
Transmitter Specifications........................................................... 7  
Receiver Specifications ................................................................ 9  
Timing and Digital Specifications............................................ 13  
Auxilary Block Specifications ................................................... 14  
General Specifications ............................................................... 15  
Timing Specifications ................................................................ 16  
Absolute Maximum Ratings.......................................................... 17  
ESD Caution................................................................................ 17  
Pin Configuration and Function Descriptions........................... 18  
Typical Performance Characteristics ........................................... 20  
Terminology .................................................................................... 32  
Radio Control.................................................................................. 33  
Radio States ................................................................................. 33  
Initialization ................................................................................ 35  
Commands.................................................................................. 35  
Automatic State Transitions ...................................................... 37  
State Transition and Command Timing.................................. 38  
Packet Mode .................................................................................... 43  
Preamble ...................................................................................... 43  
Sync Word ................................................................................... 44  
Payload......................................................................................... 45  
CRC .............................................................................................. 46  
Postamble..................................................................................... 47  
Transmit Packet Timing ............................................................ 47  
Data Whitening .......................................................................... 48  
Manchester Encoding ................................................................ 48  
8b/10b Encoding ........................................................................ 48  
Sport Mode...................................................................................... 49  
Packet Structure in Sport Mode ............................................... 49  
Sport Mode in Transmit ............................................................ 49  
Sport Mode in Receive............................................................... 49  
Transmit Bit Latencies in Sport Mode..................................... 49  
Interrupt Generation...................................................................... 52  
Recommended Receiver Settings for  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK ......................................................... 81  
Recommended Receiver Settings for OOK ............................ 82  
Rev. C | Page 2 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Peripheral Features..........................................................................83  
Analog-to-Digital Converter.....................................................83  
Temperature Sensor....................................................................83  
Test DAC ......................................................................................83  
Transmit Test Modes ..................................................................83  
Silicon Revision Readback.........................................................83  
Applications Information...............................................................84  
Application Circuit .....................................................................84  
REVISION HISTORY  
Host Processor Interface ............................................................85  
PA/LNA Matching ......................................................................85  
Command Reference......................................................................87  
Register Maps ..................................................................................88  
BBRAM Register Description ...................................................90  
MCR Register Description.......................................................100  
Outline Dimensions......................................................................109  
Ordering Guide .........................................................................109  
7/12—Rev. B to Rev. C  
Added Figure 103; Renumbered Sequentially.............................70  
Changes to Writing a Module to Program RAM Section..........71  
Changes to Automatic PA Ramp Section Equation and Image  
Channel Rejection Section.............................................................75  
Changes to Temperature Sensor Section and Table 43 ..............83  
Changes to Figure 110 ....................................................................84  
Changes to Figure 111 and Figure 112.........................................85  
Changes to Support for External PA and LNA Control Section  
and Table 45 .....................................................................................86  
Changes to CMD_SYNC Description Column, Table 46..........87  
Changes to Table 48 ........................................................................88  
Changes to Table 49 ........................................................................89  
Changes to SYNTH_LUT_CONTROL_1 Description Column,  
Table 70.............................................................................................93  
Changes to Table 78 ........................................................................96  
Changes to Table 79 ........................................................................97  
Changes to Table 84 and Table 86.................................................98  
Changes to Table 94 ........................................................................99  
Added Table 95, Table 96, and Table 97; Renumbered  
Changes to Features Section ............................................................1  
Changed 1.8 V to 2.2 V, General Description Section .................4  
Changed 1.8 V to 2.2 V, Table 1 Summary ....................................6  
Changed 1.8 V to 2.2 V, Table 2.......................................................7  
Changes to Table 3 ............................................................................9  
Changes to Table 5 ..........................................................................14  
Changes to VDD Parameter, Table 6...............................................15  
Changes to Timing Specifications Section...................................16  
Deleted t1 from Table 7, Figure 2, and Figure 3...........................16  
Changes to Table 9 ..........................................................................18  
Changes to Figure 5 to Figure 10 ..................................................20  
Changes to Figure 11, Figure 12 Caption, Figure 13 and  
Figure 14 Caption............................................................................21  
Changes to Figure 19 Caption to Figure 21 Caption..................22  
Changes to Figure 26 Caption .......................................................23  
Changes to Figure 34 Caption .......................................................24  
Changes to Figure 61 Caption and Figure 64 Caption...............29  
Changes to Figure 72 ......................................................................31  
Changes to PHY_SLEEP Section ..................................................33  
Changes to Initialization After Application of Power Section,  
Initialization After Issuing the CMD_HW_RESET Command  
Section, Initialization on Transitioning from PHY_SLEEP  
Sequentially....................................................................................100  
Changes to Table 101....................................................................101  
Added Table 124 and Table 125...................................................105  
3/11—Rev. A to Rev. B  
CS  
(After  
Is Brought Low) Section, and Initialization After a  
Changes to RSSI Method 3, Formula ...........................................72  
Changes to RSSI Method 4, Step 3................................................72  
Changes to RSSI Method 4, Step 5 Formula and Formula  
Approximation ................................................................................73  
Added Register 0x361 to Table 49.................................................85  
Added Table 129, Renumbered Subsequent Tables..................104  
WUC Timeout Section...................................................................35  
Changes to CMD_RAM_LOAD_DONE (0xC7) Section .........37  
Deleted CMD_SYNC (0xA2) Section ..........................................37  
Changes to State Transition and Command Timing Section....38  
Changes to Table 11 and Table 12 .................................................39  
Changes to Addressing Section.....................................................45  
Changes to Example Address Check Section, Table 18, and CRC  
Section ..............................................................................................46  
Changes to Figure 79 ......................................................................47  
Changes to Figure 81 and Figure 82 .............................................50  
Changes to Figure 83 and Figure 84 .............................................51  
Changes to CMD_FINISHED Description, Table 24.................53  
Changes to Command Access Section .........................................56  
Changes to Figure 97 ......................................................................63  
Changes to Table 29 ........................................................................68  
Added Calibrating the RC Oscillator Section, Performing a Fine  
Calibration of the RC Oscillator Section, and Performing a  
Coarse Calibration of the RC Oscillator Section ........................69  
2/11—Rev. 0 to Rev. A  
Changes to Table 9, DGUARD Description ................................18  
Changes to Sport Mode in Receive Section.................................47  
Changes to Crystal Oscillator Section, Typical Crystal Load  
Capacitance Tuning Range Value, and to Table 31.....................70  
Changes to RSSI Method 3 Section ..............................................72  
Changes to RSSI Method 4 Section ..............................................73  
Changes to Table 41, 9.6 kbps and 1 kbps Data Rate  
Setup Values.....................................................................................78  
Changes to Table 108, ADC_PD_N Description......................100  
8/10—Revision 0: Initial Version  
Rev. C | Page 3 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM  
ADCIN_ATB3  
IRQ  
IRQ_GP3  
4kB ROM  
MAC  
FSK  
ASK  
CTRL  
LNA  
DEMOD  
RFIO_1P  
RSSI/  
LOGAMP  
CS  
8-BIT RISC  
PROCESSOR  
8-BIT  
ADC  
2kB RAM  
RFIO_1N  
MISO  
SCLK  
MOSI  
CDR  
AFC  
AGC  
SPI  
256 BYTE  
PACKET  
RAM  
PA  
64 BYTE  
BBRAM  
26MHz OSC  
LOOP  
FILTER  
CHARGE  
PUMP  
GPIO  
DIVIDER  
PA  
RFO2  
PFD  
256 BYTE  
MCR RAM  
TEST  
DAC  
1
DIVIDER  
GPIO  
PA RAMP  
PROFILE  
fDEV  
WAKE-UP CONTROL  
TIMER UNIT  
GAUSSIAN  
FILTER  
CLOCK  
DIVIDER  
Σ-Δ  
MODULATOR  
ADF7023  
ANALOG  
TEST  
TEMP  
SENSOR  
BATTERY  
MONITOR  
32kHz  
OSC  
32kHz  
RCOSC  
26MHz  
OSC  
BIAS  
CREGRFx CREGVCO CREGSYNTH CREGDIGx RBIAS  
GPIO REFERS TO PINS 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, AND 27.  
XOSC32KN_ATB2 XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1 XOSC26N XOSC26P  
1
Figure 1.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The ADF7023 is a very low power, high performance, highly  
integrated 2FSK/GFSK/OOK/MSK/GMSK transceiver designed  
for operation in the 862 MHz to 928 MHz and 431 MHz to  
464 MHz frequency bands, which cover the worldwide license-  
free ISM bands at 433 MHz, 868 MHz, and 915 MHz. It is suitable  
for circuit applications that operate under the European ETSI  
EN300-220, the North American FCC (Part 15), the Chinese short-  
range wireless regulatory standards, or other similar regional  
standards. Data rates from 1 kbps to 300 kbps are supported.  
A patent pending, image rejection calibration scheme is available  
through a program download. The algorithm does not require  
the use of an external RF source nor does it require any user  
intervention once initiated. The results of the calibration can be  
stored in nonvolatile memory for use on subsequent power-ups  
of the transceiver.  
The ADF7023 operates with a power supply range of 2.2 V to  
3.6 V and has very low power consumption in both Tx and Rx  
modes, enabling long lifetimes in battery-operated systems  
while maintaining excellent RF performance. The device can  
enter a low power sleep mode in which the configuration  
settings are retained in BBRAM.  
The transmit RF synthesizer contains a VCO and a low noise  
fractional-N PLL with an output channel frequency resolution  
of 400 Hz. The VCO operates at 2× or 4×, the fundamental  
frequency to reduce spurious emissions. The receive and transmit  
synthesizer bandwidths are automatically, and independently,  
configured to achieve optimum phase noise, modulation quality,  
and settling time. The transmitter output power is programmable  
from −20 dBm to +13.5 dBm, with automatic PA ramping to  
meet transient spurious specifications. The part possesses both  
single-ended and differential PAs, which allows for Tx antenna  
diversity.  
The ADF7023 features an ultralow power, on-chip,  
communications processor. The communications processor,  
which is an 8-bit RISC processor, performs the radio control,  
packet management, and smart wake mode (SWM) functionality.  
The communications processor eases the processing burden of  
the companion processor by integrating the lower layers of a  
typical communication protocol stack. The communications  
processor also permits the download and execution of a set of  
firmware modules that include image rejection (IR) calibration,  
AES encryption, and Reed Solomon coding.  
The receiver is exceptionally linear, achieving an IP3 specification  
of −12.2 dBm and −11.5 dBm at maximum gain and minimum  
gain, respectively, and an IP2 specification of 18.5 dBm and  
27 dBm at maximum gain and minimum gain, respectively. The  
receiver achieves an interference blocking specification of 66 dB  
at 2 MHz offset and 74 dB at 10 MHz offset. Thus, the part is  
extremely resilient to the presence of interferers in spectrally  
noisy environments. The receiver features a novel, high speed,  
automatic frequency control (AFC) loop, allowing the PLL to  
find and correct any RF frequency errors in the recovered packet.  
The communications processor provides a simple command-based  
radio control interface for the host processor. A single-byte  
command transitions the radio between states or performs a  
radio function.  
Rev. C | Page 4 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
The communications processor provides support for generic  
packet formats. The packet format is highly flexible and fully  
programmable, thereby ensuring its compatibility with  
These interrupt conditions can be configured to include the  
reception of valid preamble, sync word, CRC, or address match.  
Wake-up from sleep mode can also be triggered by the host  
processor. For systems requiring very accurate wake-up timing,  
a 32 kHz oscillator can be used to drive the wake-up timer.  
Alternatively, the internal RC oscillator can be used, which gives  
lower current consumption in sleep.  
proprietary packet profiles. In transmit mode, the commun-  
ications processor can be configured to add preamble, sync  
word, and CRC to the payload data stored in packet RAM. In  
receive mode, the communications processor can detect and  
interrupt the host processor on reception of preamble, sync  
word, address, and CRC and store the received payload to  
packet RAM. The ADF7023 uses an efficient interrupt system  
comprising MAC level interrupts and PHY level interrupts that  
can be individually set. The payload data plus the 16-bit CRC  
can be encoded/decoded using Manchester or 8b/10b encoding.  
Alternatively, data whitening and dewhitening can be applied.  
The ADF7023 features an advanced encryption standard (AES)  
engine with hardware acceleration that provides 128-bit block  
encryption and decryption with key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits,  
and 256 bits. Both electronic code book (ECB) and Cipher  
Block Chaining Mode 1 (CBC Mode 1) are supported. The AES  
engine can be used to encrypt/decrypt packet data and can be  
used as a standalone engine for encryption/decryption by the  
host processor. The AES engine is enabled on the ADF7023 by  
downloading the AES software module to program RAM. The  
AES software module is available from Analog Devices, Inc.  
The smart wake mode (SWM) allows the ADF7023 to wake up  
autonomously from sleep using the internal wake-up timer  
without intervention from the host processor. After wake-up,  
the ADF7023 is controlled by the communications processor.  
This functionality allows carrier sense, packet sniffing, and  
packet reception while the host processor is in sleep, thereby  
reducing overall system current consumption. The smart wake  
mode can wake the host processor on an interrupt condition.  
An on-chip, 8-bit ADC provides readback of an external analog  
input, the RSSI signal, or an integrated temperature sensor. An  
integrated battery voltage monitor raises an interrupt flag to the  
host processor whenever the battery voltage drops below a user-  
defined threshold.  
Rev. C | Page 5 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
SPECIFICATIONS  
VDD = VDDBAT1 = VDDBAT2 = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, GND = 0 V, TA = TMIN to TMAX, unless otherwise noted. Typical specifications are at  
V
DD = 3 V, TA = 25°C.  
RF AND SYNTHESIZER SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 1.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
RF CHARACTERISTICS  
Frequency Ranges  
862  
431  
928  
464  
MHz  
MHz  
PHASE-LOCKED LOOP  
Channel Frequency Resolution  
Phase Noise (In-Band)  
396.7  
−88  
Hz  
dBc/Hz  
10 kHz offset, PA output power = 10 dBm,  
RF = 868 MHz  
Phase Noise at Offset of  
1 MHz  
2 MHz  
10 MHz  
VCO Calibration Time  
Synthesizer Settling Time  
−126  
−131  
−142  
142  
dBc/Hz  
dBc/Hz  
dBc/Hz  
µs  
PA output power = 10 dBm, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
PA output power = 10 dBm, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
PA output power = 10 dBm, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
56  
µs  
Frequency synthesizer settles to within 5 ppm of the  
target frequency within this time following the VCO  
calibration, transmit, and receive, 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR  
Crystal Frequency  
Recommended Load Capacitance  
Maximum Crystal ESR  
Pin Capacitance  
26  
MHz  
pF  
Ω
pF  
µs  
Parallel load resonant crystal  
7
18  
1800  
2.1  
310  
388  
26 MHz crystal with 18 pF load capacitance  
Capacitance for XOSC26P and XOSC26N  
26 MHz crystal with 7 pF load capacitance  
26 MHz crystal with 18 pF load capacitance  
Start-Up Time  
µs  
SPURIOUS EMISSIONS  
Integer Boundary Spurious  
910.1 MHz  
−39  
−79  
dBc  
dBc  
Using 130 kHz synthesizer bandwidth, integer  
boundary spur at 910 MHz (26 MHz × 35), inside  
synthesizer loop bandwidth  
Using 130 kHz synthesizer bandwidth, integer  
boundary spur at 910 MHz (26 MHz × 35), outside  
synthesizer loop bandwidth  
911.0 MHz  
Reference Spurious  
868 MHz/915 MHz  
−80  
−60  
dBc  
dBc  
Using 130 kHz synthesizer bandwidth and using  
92 kHz synthesizer bandwidth (default for PHY_RX)  
Measured in a span of 350 MHz for synthesizer  
bandwidth = 92 kHz, RF frequency = 868.95 MHz, PA  
output power = 10 dBm, VDD = 3.6 V, single-ended PA  
used  
Clock-Related Spur Level  
Rev. C | Page 6 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 2.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
DATA RATE  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
OOK  
1
2.4  
300  
19.2  
kbps  
kbps  
Manchester encoding enabled (Manchester chip  
rate = 2 × data rate)  
Data Rate Resolution  
MODULATION ERROR RATE (MER)  
10 kbps to 49.5 kbps  
49.6 kbps to 129.5 kbps  
129.6 kbps to 179.1 kbps  
179.2 kbps to 239.9 kbps  
240 kbps to 300 kbps  
MODULATION  
100  
bps  
RF frequency = 928 MHz, GFSK  
Modulation index = 1  
Modulation index = 1  
Modulation index = 0.5  
Modulation index = 0.5  
Modulation index = 0.5  
25.4  
25.3  
23.9  
23.3  
23  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK Frequency 0.1  
Deviation  
Deviation Frequency Resolution  
Gaussian Filter BT  
409.5 kHz  
Hz  
100  
0.5  
Nonprogrammable  
OOK  
PA Off Feedthrough  
VCO Frequency Pulling  
−94  
30  
dBm  
kHz  
rms  
Data rate = 19.2 kbps (38.4 kcps Manchester  
encoded), PA output = 10 dBm, PA ramp rate =  
64 codes/bit  
SINGLE-ENDED PA  
Maximum Power1  
Minimum Power  
Transmit Power Variation vs.  
Temperature  
13.5  
−20  
0.5  
dBm  
dBm  
dB  
Programmable, separate PA and LNA match2  
From −40°C to +85°C, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
From 2.2 V to 3.6 V, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
From 902 MHz to 928 MHz and 863 MHz to  
870 MHz  
Transmit Power Variation vs. VDD  
Transmit Power Flatness  
1
1
dB  
dB  
Programmable Step Size  
−20 dBm to +13.5 dBm  
DIFFERENTIAL PA  
0.5  
dB  
Programmable in 63 steps  
Maximum Power1  
10  
−20  
1
dBm  
dBm  
dB  
Programmable  
Minimum Power  
Transmit Power Variation vs.  
Temperature  
From −40°C to +85°C, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
Transmit Power Variation vs. VDD  
Transmit Power Flatness  
Programmable Step Size  
−20 dBm to +10 dBm  
HARMONICS  
2
1
dB  
dB  
From 2.2 V to 3.6 V, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
From 863 MHz to 870 MHz  
0.5  
dB  
Programmable in 63 steps  
868 MHz, unfiltered conductive, PA output power  
= 10 dBm  
Single-Ended PA  
Second Harmonic  
Third Harmonic  
All Other Harmonics  
Differential PA  
−15.1  
−29.3  
−47.6  
dBc  
dBc  
dBc  
Second Harmonic  
Third Harmonic  
All Other Harmonics  
−23.2  
−25.2  
−24.2  
dBc  
dBc  
dBc  
Rev. C | Page 7 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
OPTIMUM PA LOAD IMPEDANCE  
Single-Ended PA, in Transmit Mode  
fRF = 915 MHz  
50.8 + j10.2  
45.5 + j12.1  
46.8 + j19.9  
Ω
Ω
Ω
fRF = 868 MHz  
fRF = 433 MHz  
Single-Ended PA, in Receive Mode  
fRF = 915 MHz  
fRF = 868 MHz  
9.4 − j124  
9.5 − j130.6  
11.9 − j260.1  
Ω
Ω
Ω
fRF = 433 MHz  
Differential PA, in Transmit Mode  
Load impedance between RFIO_1P and RFIO_1N  
to ensure maximum output power  
fRF = 915 MHz  
fRF = 868 MHz  
fRF = 433 MHz  
20.5 + j36.4  
24.7 + j36.5  
55.6 + j81.5  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1 Measured as the maximum unmodulated power.  
2 A combined single-ended PA and LNA match can reduce the maximum achievable output power by up to 1 dB.  
Rev. C | Page 8 of 112  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 3.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK INPUT  
SENSITIVITY, BIT ERROR RATE (BER)  
At BER = 1E − 3, RF frequency = 433 MHz, 868 MHz,  
915 MHz, LNA and PA matched separately1  
1.0 kbps  
10 kbps  
−116  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
Frequency deviation = 4.8 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 9.6 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 20 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 12.5 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 25 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 37.5 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
150 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 50 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
200 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 75 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
300 kHz  
−111  
38.4 kbps  
50 kbps  
−107.5  
−106.5  
−105  
100 kbps  
150 kbps  
200 kbps  
300 kbps  
−104  
−103  
−100.5  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK INPUT  
SENSITIVITY, PACKET ERROR RATE (PER)  
At PER = 1%, RF frequency = 433 MHz, 868 MHz, 915 MHz,  
LNA and PA matched separately1, packet length =  
128 bits, packet mode  
1.0 kbps  
9.6 kbps  
38.4 kbps  
50 kbps  
−115.5  
−110.6  
−106  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
Frequency deviation = 4.8 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 9.6 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 20 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 12.5 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 25 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
100 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 37.5 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
150 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 50 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
200 kHz  
Frequency deviation = 75 kHz, IF filter bandwidth =  
300 kHz  
−104.3  
−102.6  
−101  
100 kbps  
150 kbps  
200 kbps  
300 kbps  
−99.1  
−97.9  
OOK INPUT SENSITIVITY, PACKET ERROR  
RATE (PER)  
At PER = 1%, RF frequency = 433 MHz, 868 MHz, 915 MHz,  
LNA and PA matched separately1, packet length =  
128 bits, packet mode, IF filter bandwidth = 100 kHz  
19.2 kbps (38.4 kcps, Manchester  
Encoded)  
2.4 kbps (4.8 kcps, Manchester  
Encoded)  
−104.7  
−109.7  
dBm  
dBm  
LNA AND MIXER, INPUT IP3  
Receiver LO frequency (fLO) = 914.8 MHz, fSOURCE1 = fLO  
0.4 MHz, fSOURCE2 = fLO + 0.7 MHz  
+
+
Minimum LNA Gain  
Maximum LNA Gain  
−11.5  
−12.2  
dBm  
dBm  
LNA AND MIXER, INPUT IP2  
Receiver LO frequency (fLO) = 920.8 MHz, fSOURCE1 = fLO  
1.1 MHz, fSOURCE2 = fLO + 1.3 MHz  
Max LNA Gain, Max Mixer Gain  
Min LNA Gain, Min Mixer Gain  
18.5  
27  
dBm  
dBm  
Rev. C | Page 9 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
LNA AND MIXER, 1 dB COMPRESSION  
POINT  
RF frequency = 915 MHz  
Max LNA Gain, Max Mixer Gain  
Min LNA Gain, Min Mixer Gain  
ADJACENT CHANNEL REJECTION  
CW Interferer  
−21.9  
−21  
dBm  
dBm  
Wanted signal 3 dB above the input sensitivity level  
(BER = 10−3), CW interferer power level increased until  
BER = 10−3, image calibrated  
200 kHz Channel Spacing  
300 kHz Channel Spacing  
38  
39  
38  
40  
41  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
IF BW = 100 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 12.5 kHz,  
DR = 50 kbps  
IF BW = 100 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 25 kHz,  
DR = 100 kbps  
IF BW = 150 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 37.5 kHz,  
DR = 150 kbps  
IF BW = 200 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 50 kHz,  
DR = 200 kbps  
IF BW = 300 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 75 kHz,  
DR = 300 kbps  
Wanted signal 3 dB above the input sensitivity level  
(BER = 10−3), modulated interferer with the same  
modulation as the wanted signal; interferer power  
level increased until BER = 10−3, image calibrated  
400 kHz Channel Spacing  
600 kHz Channel Spacing  
Modulated Interferer  
200 kHz Channel Spacing  
300 kHz Channel Spacing  
300 kHz Channel Spacing  
400 kHz Channel Spacing  
600 kHz Channel Spacing  
CO-CHANNEL REJECTION  
38  
36  
36  
34  
35  
−4  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
IF BW = 100 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 12.5 kHz,  
DR = 50 kbps  
IF BW = 100 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 25 kHz,  
DR = 100 kbps  
IF BW = 150 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 37.5 kHz,  
DR = 150 kbps  
IF BW = 200 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 50 kHz,  
DR = 200 kbps  
IF BW = 300 kHz, wanted signal: FDEV = 75 kHz,  
DR = 300 kbps  
Desired signal 10 dB above the input sensitivity level  
(BER = 10−3), data rate = 38.4 kbps, frequency deviation  
= 20 kHz, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
BLOCKING  
Desired signal 3 dB above the input sensitivity level  
(BER = 10−3) of −107.5 dBm (data rate = 38.4 kbps),  
modulated interferer power level increased until BER =  
10−3 (see the Typical Performance Characteristics  
section for blocking at other offsets and IF  
bandwidths)  
RF Frequency = 433 MHz  
2 MHz  
10 MHz  
68  
76  
dB  
dB  
RF Frequency = 868 MHz  
2 MHz  
66  
74  
dB  
dB  
10 MHz  
RF Frequency = 915 MHz  
2 MHz  
66  
74  
dB  
dB  
10 MHz  
Rev. C | Page 10 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
BLOCKING, ETSI EN 300 220  
Measurement procedure as per ETSI EN 300 220-1  
V2.3.1; desired signal 3 dB above the ETSI EN 300 220  
reference sensitivity level of −99 dBm, IF bandwidth =  
100 kHz, data rate = 38.4 kbps, unmodulated  
interferer; see the Typical Performance Characteristics  
section for blocking at other offsets and IF  
bandwidths, RF frequency = 868 MHz  
2 MHz  
10 MHz  
−28  
−20.5  
75  
dBm  
dBm  
dB  
WIDEBAND INTERFERENCE REJECTION  
RF frequency = 868 MHz, swept from 10 MHz to  
100 MHz either side of the RF frequency  
IMAGE CHANNEL ATTENUATION  
Measured as image attenuation at the IF filter output,  
carrier wave interferer at 400 kHz below the channel  
frequency, 100 kHz IF filter bandwidth  
Uncalibrated/calibrated  
868 MHz, 915 MHz  
433 MHz  
36/45  
40/54  
dB  
dB  
Uncalibrated/calibrated  
AFC  
Accuracy  
1
kHz  
Maximum Pull-In Range  
Achievable pull-in range dependent on discriminator  
bandwidth and modulation  
300 kHz IF Filter Bandwidth  
200 kHz IF Filter Bandwidth  
150 kHz IF Filter Bandwidth  
100 kHz IF Filter Bandwidth  
PREAMBLE LENGTH  
150  
100  
75  
kHz  
kHz  
kHz  
kHz  
50  
Minimum number of preamble bits to ensure the  
minimum packet error rate across the full input power  
range  
AFC Off, AGC Lock on Sync Word  
Detection  
38.4 kbps  
300 kbps  
8
24  
Bits  
Bits  
AFC On, AFC and AGC Lock on  
Preamble Detection  
9.6 kbps  
38.4 kbps  
50 kbps  
100 kbps  
150 kbps  
200 kbps  
300 kbps  
44  
44  
50  
52  
54  
58  
64  
Bits  
Bits  
Bits  
Bits  
Bits  
Bits  
Bits  
AFC On, AFC and AGC Lock on Sync  
Word Detection  
38.4 kbps  
300 kbps  
14  
32  
Bits  
Bits  
RSSI  
Range at Input  
Linearity  
Absolute Accuracy  
SATURATION (MAXIMUM INPUT LEVEL)  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
OOK  
−97 to −26  
2
3
dBm  
dB  
dB  
12  
−13  
10  
dBm  
dBm  
dBm  
OOK modulation depth = 20 dB  
OOK modulation depth = 60 dB  
Rev. C | Page 11 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
LNA INPUT IMPEDANCE  
Receive Mode  
fRF = 915 MHz  
fRF = 868 MHz  
fRF = 433 MHz  
75.9 − j32.3  
78.0 − j32.4  
95.5 − j23.9  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Transmit Mode  
fRF = 915 MHz  
fRF = 868 MHz  
7.6 + j9.2  
7.7 + j8.6  
7.9 + j4.6  
Ω
Ω
Ω
fRF = 433 MHz  
RX SPURIOUS EMISSIONS2  
Maximum <1 GHz  
Maximum >1 GHz  
At antenna input, unfiltered conductive  
At antenna input, unfiltered conductive  
−66  
−62  
dBm  
dBm  
1 Sensitivity for combined matching network case is typically 1 dB less than separate matching networks.  
2 Follow the matching and layout guidelines to achieve the relevant FCC/ETSI specifications.  
Rev. C | Page 12 of 112  
 
 
 
ADF7023  
TIMING AND DIGITAL SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 4.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
RX AND TX TIMING PARAMETERS  
See the State Transition and Command Timing  
section for more details  
PHY_ON to PHY_RX (on CMD_PHY_RX)  
PHY_ON to PHY_TX (on CMD_PHY_TX)  
300  
296  
μs  
μs  
Includes VCO calibration and synthesizer settling  
Includes VCO calibration and synthesizer settling,  
does not include PA ramp-up  
LOGIC INPUTS  
Input High Voltage, VINH  
Input Low Voltage, VINL  
Input Current, IINH/IINL  
Input Capacitance, CIN  
LOGIC OUTPUTS  
0.7 × VDD  
V
V
µA  
pF  
0.2 × V DD  
1
10  
Output High Voltage, VOH  
Output Low Voltage, VOL  
GPIO Rise/Fall  
GPIO Load  
Maximum Output Current  
ATB OUTPUTS  
VDD − 0.4  
V
V
ns  
pF  
mA  
IOH = 500 µA  
IOL = 500 µA  
0.4  
5
10  
5
Used for external PA and LNA control  
ADCIN_ATB3 and ATB4  
Output High Voltage, VOH  
Output Low Voltage, VOL  
Maximum Output Current  
1.8  
0.1  
0.5  
V
V
mA  
XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1 and  
XOSC32KN_ATB2  
Output High Voltage, VOH  
Output Low Voltage, VOL  
Maximum Output Current  
VDD  
0.1  
5
V
V
mA  
Rev. C | Page 13 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
AUXILARY BLOCK SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 5.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
32 kHz RC OSCILLATOR  
Frequency  
Frequency Accuracy  
Frequency Drift  
32.768  
1.5  
kHz  
%
After calibration  
After calibration at 25°C  
Temperature Coefficient  
Voltage Coefficient  
Calibration Time  
32 kHz XTAL OSCILLATOR  
Frequency  
0.14  
4
1.25  
%/°C  
%/V  
ms  
32.768  
630  
kHz  
ms  
Start-Up Time  
32.768 kHz crystal with 7 pF load capacitance  
WAKE UP CONTROLLER (WUC)  
Hardware Timer  
Wake-Up Period  
Firmware Timer  
61 × 10−6  
1
1.31 × 105  
216  
sec  
Wake-Up Period  
Hardware Firmware counter counts of the number of  
periods  
hardware wake-ups, resolution of 16 bits  
ADC  
Resolution  
DNL  
INL  
Conversion Time  
Input Capacitance  
BATTERY MONITOR  
Absolute Accuracy  
Alarm Voltage Set Point  
Alarm Voltage Step Size  
Start-Up Time  
8
Bits  
LSB  
LSB  
µs  
1
1
VDD from 2.2 V to 3.6 V, TA = 25°C  
VDD from 2.2 V to 3.6 V, TA = 25°C  
1
12.4  
pF  
45  
62  
mV  
V
mV  
µs  
1.7  
2.7  
5-bit resolution  
When enabled  
100  
Current Consumption  
TEMPERATURE SENSOR  
Range  
Resolution  
Accuracy of Temperature Readback  
30  
µA  
−40  
+85  
°C  
°C  
°C  
0.3  
+7/−4  
With averaging  
Over temperature range −40°C to +85°C  
(calibrated at +25°C)  
Rev. C | Page 14 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 6.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
TEMPERATURE RANGE, TA  
VOLTAGE SUPPLY  
VDD  
−40  
+85  
°C  
2.2  
3.6  
V
Applied to VDDBAT1 and VDDBAT2  
TRANSMIT CURRENT CONSUMPTION  
In the PHY_TX state, single-ended PA matched to 50 Ω,  
differential PA matched to 100 Ω, separate single-ended  
PA and LNA match, combined differential PA and LNA  
match  
Single-Ended PA, 433 MHz  
−10 dBm  
0 dBm  
10 dBm  
13.5 dBm  
8.7  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
12.2  
23.3  
32.1  
Differential PA, 433 MHz  
−10 dBm  
0 dBm  
5 dBm  
10 dBm  
7.9  
11  
15  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
22.6  
Single-Ended PA, 868 MHz/915 MHz  
−10 dBm  
0 dBm  
10 dBm  
13.5 dBm  
10.3  
13.3  
24.1  
32.1  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Differential PA, 868 MHz/915 MHz  
−10 dBm  
0 dBm  
5 dBm  
10 dBm  
9.3  
12  
16.7  
28  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
POWER MODES  
PHY_SLEEP (Deep Sleep Mode 2)  
0.18  
0.33  
0.75  
1.28  
1
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
mA  
Sleep mode, wake-up configuration values (BBRAM) not  
retained  
Sleep mode, wake-up configuration values (BBRAM)  
retained  
WUC active, RC oscillator running, wake-up configuration  
values retained (BBRAM)  
WUC active, 32 kHz crystal running, wake-up configuration  
values retained (BBRAM)  
PHY_SLEEP (Deep Sleep Mode 1)  
PHY_SLEEP (RCO Wake Mode)  
PHY_SLEEP (XTO Wake Mode)  
PHY_OFF  
Device in PHY_OFF state, 26 MHz oscillator running, digital  
and synthesizer regulators active, all register values  
retained  
PHY_ON  
1
mA  
mA  
Device in PHY_ON state, 26 MHz oscillator running, digital,  
synthesizer, VCO, and RF regulators active, baseband filter  
calibration performed, all register values retained  
PHY_RX  
12.8  
Device in PHY_RX state  
SMART WAKE MODE  
Average current consumption  
21.78  
11.75  
µA  
µA  
Autonomous reception every 1 sec, with receive dwell  
time of 1.25 ms, using RC oscillator, data rate = 38.4 kbps  
Autonomous reception every 1 sec, with receive dwell  
time of 0.5 ms, using RC oscillator, data rate = 300 kbps  
Rev. C | Page 15 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS  
VDD = VDDBAT1 = VDDBAT2 = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, VGND = GND = 0 V, TA = TMIN to TMAX, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 7. SPI Interface Timing  
Parameter  
Limit  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
CS low to SCLK setup time  
SCLK high time  
SCLK low time  
SCLK period  
SCLK falling edge to MISO delay  
MOSI to SCLK rising edge setup time  
MOSI to SCLK rising edge hold time  
SCLK falling edge to CS hold time  
CS high time  
t2  
85  
ns min  
ns min  
ns min  
ns min  
ns max  
ns min  
ns min  
ns min  
ns min  
µs typ  
ns max  
ns max  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
t7  
t8  
t9  
85  
85  
170  
10  
5
5
85  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t14  
270  
310  
20  
CS low to MISO high wake-up time, 26 MHz crystal with 7 pF load capacitance, TA = 25°C  
SCLK rise time  
SCLK fall time  
20  
Timing Diagrams  
CS  
t11  
t2  
t3 t4  
t5  
t13  
t14  
t9  
SCLK  
MISO  
t6  
BIT 7  
BIT 6  
BIT 5  
BIT 4  
BIT 3  
BIT 2  
BIT 1  
BIT 0  
BIT 7  
BIT 0  
X
BIT 7  
t8  
t7  
MOSI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
7
Figure 2. SPI Interface Timing  
CS  
t9  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SCLK  
t12  
t6  
MISO  
X
SPI STATE  
SLEEP  
WAKE UP  
SPI READY  
CS  
)
Figure 3. PHY_SLEEP to SPI Ready State Timing (SPI Ready T12 After Falling Edge of  
Rev. C | Page 16 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
TA = 25°C, unless otherwise noted.  
Connect the exposed paddle of the LFCSP package to ground.  
This device is a high performance, RF integrated circuit with an  
ESD rating of <2 kV; it is ESD sensitive. Proper precautions  
should be taken for handling and assembly.  
Table 8.  
Parameter  
Rating  
VDDBAT1, VDDBAT2 to GND  
Operating Temperature Range  
Industrial  
Storage Temperature Range  
Maximum Junction Temperature  
LFCSP θJA Thermal Impedance  
Reflow Soldering  
−0.3 V to +3.96 V  
ESD CAUTION  
−40°C to +85°C  
−65°C to +125°C  
150°C  
26°C/W  
Peak Temperature  
Time at Peak Temperature  
260°C  
40 sec  
Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings  
may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress  
rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any  
other conditions above those indicated in the operational  
section of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute  
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Rev. C | Page 17 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS  
CREGRF1  
RBIAS  
CREGRF2  
RFIO_1P  
RFIO_1N  
RFO2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24 CS  
23  
22 SCLK  
21 MISO  
MOSI  
ADF7023  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
20  
19  
IRQ_GP3  
GP2  
EPAD  
VDDBAT2  
NC  
18 GP1  
17 GP0  
NOTES  
1. NC = NO CONNECT.  
2. CONNECT EXPOSED PAD TO GND.  
Figure 4. Pin Configuration  
Table 9. Pin Function Descriptions  
Pin No.  
Mnemonic  
Function  
1
CREGRF1  
Regulator Voltage for RF. A 220 nF capacitor should be placed between this pin and ground for  
regulator stability and noise rejection.  
2
3
RBIAS  
CREGRF2  
External Bias Resistor. A 36 kΩ resistor with 2% tolerance should be used.  
Regulator Voltage for RF. A 220 nF capacitor should be placed between this pin and ground for  
regulator stability and noise rejection.  
4
5
6
7
RFIO_1P  
RFIO_1N  
RFO2  
LNA Positive Input in Receive Mode. PA positive output in transmit mode with differential PA.  
LNA Negative Input in Receive Mode. PA negative output in transmit mode with differential PA.  
Single-Ended PA Output.  
Power Supply Pin Two. Decoupling capacitors to the ground plane should be placed as close as  
possible to this pin.  
VDDBAT2  
8
9
NC  
CREGVCO  
No Connect.  
Regulator Voltage for the VCO. A 220 nF capacitor should be placed between this pin and ground for  
regulator stability and noise rejection.  
10  
11  
VCOGUARD  
CREGSYNTH  
Guard/Screen for VCO. This pin should be connected to Pin 9.  
Regulator Voltage for the Synthesizer. A 220 nF capacitor should be placed between this pin and  
ground for regulator stability and noise rejection.  
12  
13  
14  
CWAKEUP  
XOSC26P  
XOSC26N  
External Capacitor for Wake-Up Control. A 150 nF capacitor should be placed between this pin and  
ground.  
The 26 MHz reference crystal should be connected between this pin and XOSC26N. If an external  
reference is connected to XOSC26N, this pin should be left open circuited.  
The 26 MHz reference crystal should be connected between this pin and XOSC26P. Alternatively, an  
external 26 MHz reference signal can be ac-coupled to this pin.  
15  
16  
DGUARD  
CREGDIG1  
Internal Guard/Screen for the Digital Circuitry. Connect this pin to Pin 16, CREGDIG1.  
Regulator Voltage for Digital Section of the Chip. A 220 nF capacitor should be placed between this  
pin and ground for regulator stability and noise rejection.  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
GP0  
GP1  
GP2  
IRQ_GP3  
MISO  
Digital GPIO Pin 0.  
Digital GPIO Pin 1.  
Digital GPIO Pin 2.  
Interrupt Request, Digital GPIO Test Pin 3.  
Serial Port Master In/Slave Out.  
Rev. C | Page 18 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Pin No.  
22  
23  
Mnemonic  
Function  
SCLK  
MOSI  
CS  
Serial Port Clock.  
Serial Port Master Out/Slave In.  
Chip Select (Active Low). A pull-up resistor of 100 kΩ to VDD is recommended to prevent the host  
processor from inadvertently waking the ADF7023 from sleep.  
24  
25  
26  
GP4  
CREGDIG2  
Digital GPIO Test Pin 4.  
Regulator Voltage for Digital Section of the Chip. A 220 nF capacitor should be placed between this  
pin and ground for regulator stability and noise rejection.  
27  
28  
29  
30  
XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1  
XOSC32KN_ATB2  
VDDBAT1  
Digital GPIO Test Pin 5. A 32 kHz watch crystal can be connected between this pin and  
XOSC32KN_ATB2. Analog Test Pin 1.  
A 32 kHz watch crystal can be connected between this pin and XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1. Analog Test  
Pin 2.  
Digital Power Supply Pin One. Decoupling capacitors to the ground plane should be placed as close  
as possible to this pin.  
Analog-to-Digital Converter Input. Can be configured as an external PA enable signal. Analog Test  
Pin 3.  
ADCIN_ATB3  
31  
32  
ATB4  
ADCVREF  
Analog Test Pin 4. Can be configured as an external LNA enable signal.  
ADC Reference Output. A 220 nF capacitor should be placed between this pin and ground for  
adequate noise rejection.  
EPAD  
GND  
Exposed Package Paddle. Connect to GND.  
Rev. C | Page 19 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS  
16  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 1.8V  
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 3.0V  
12  
–40°C, 2.4V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 3.0V  
8
+25°C, 2.4V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 3.0V  
+85°C, 2.4V  
4
0
–4  
–8  
–12  
–16  
–20  
0
–20  
0
4
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64  
PA_LEVEL_MCR  
–16  
–12  
–8  
–4  
0
4
8
12  
16  
OUTPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 8. Single-Ended PA at 868 MHz: Supply Current vs. Output Power,  
Temperature, and VDD  
Figure 5. Single-Ended PA at 433 MHz: Output Power vs. PA_LEVEL_MCR  
Setting, Temperature, and VDD  
16  
40  
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 3.0V  
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 1.8V  
12  
–40°C, 2.4V  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
+25°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 3.0V  
8
+25°C, 2.4V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
4
0
+85°C, 3.0V  
+85°C, 2.4V  
–4  
–8  
–12  
–16  
–20  
0
–20  
0
4
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64  
PA_LEVEL_MCR  
–16  
–12  
–8  
–4  
0
4
8
12  
16  
PA OUTPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 9. Single-Ended PA at 915 MHz: Output Power vs. PA_LEVEL_MCR  
Setting, Temperature, and VDD  
Figure 6. Single-Ended PA at 433 MHz: Supply Current vs. Output Power,  
Temperature, and VDD (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V Operation  
Shown for Robustness)  
40  
16  
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 3.0V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
12  
35  
–40°C, 2.4V  
+25°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 3.0V  
8
+85°C, 1.8V  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
+25°C, 2.4V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
4
0
+85°C, 3.0V  
+85°C, 2.4V  
–4  
–8  
–12  
–16  
–20  
0
–20  
–16  
–12  
–8  
–4  
0
4
8
12  
16  
0
4
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64  
PA_LEVEL_MCR  
OUTPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 10. Single-Ended PA at 915 MHz: Supply Current vs. Output Power,  
Temperature, and VDD (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V Operation  
Shown for Robustness)  
Figure 7. Single-Ended PA at 868 MHz: Output Power vs. PA_LEVEL_MCR  
Setting, Temperature, and VDD  
Rev. C | Page 20 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
14  
12  
10  
8
32  
30  
28  
26  
24  
22  
20  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
6
4
2
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 1.8V  
–40°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 3.0V  
–40°C, 2.4V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 3.0V  
+85°C, 2.4V  
+85°C, 1.8V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 3.0V  
+25°C, 2.4V  
+25°C, 1.8V  
0
–2  
–4  
–6  
–8  
–10  
–12  
–14  
–16  
–18  
–20  
6
0
4
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64  
PA_LEVEL_MCR  
OUTPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 11. Differential PA at 433 MHz: Output Power vs. PA_LEVEL_MCR  
Setting, Temperature, and VDD (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V  
Operation Shown for Robustness)  
Figure 14. Differential PA at 915 MHz: Supply Current vs. Output Power,  
Temperature, and VDD (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V Operation  
Shown for Robustness)  
28  
26  
24  
22  
20  
18  
10  
0
–10  
–20  
PA RAMP = 1  
16  
PA RAMP = 2  
–30  
–40°C, 3.6V  
PA RAMP = 3  
14  
12  
10  
8
–40°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 1.8V  
PA RAMP = 4  
PA RAMP = 5  
–40  
PA RAMP = 6  
PA RAMP = 7  
–50  
–60  
6
0
50  
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500  
TIME (µs)  
OUTPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 12. Differential PA at 433 MHz: Supply Current vs. Output Power,  
Temperature, and VDD (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V Operation  
Shown for Robustness)  
Figure 15. PA Ramp-Up at Data Rate =38.4 kbps for Each PA_RAMP Setting,  
Differential PA  
10  
0
12  
10  
8
6
4
–10  
–20  
2
0
–40°C, 3.6V  
–2  
–4  
–40°C, 3.0V  
–40°C, 2.4V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 3.0V  
+85°C, 2.4V  
+85°C, 1.8V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
+25°C, 3.0V  
+25°C, 2.4V  
+25°C, 1.8V  
–30  
PA RAMP = 1  
–6  
PA RAMP = 2  
PA RAMP = 3  
–8  
–40  
–50  
–60  
PA RAMP = 4  
PA RAMP = 5  
PA RAMP = 6  
PA RAMP = 7  
–10  
–12  
–14  
–16  
–18  
–20  
0
50  
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500  
TIME (µs)  
0
4
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64  
PA_LEVEL_MCR  
Figure 16. PA Ramp-Down at Data Rate =38.4 kbps for Each PA_RAMP  
Setting, Differential PA  
Figure 13. Differential PA at 915 MHz: Output Power vs. PA_LEVEL_MCR  
Setting, Temperature, and VDD (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V  
Operation Shown for Robustness)  
Rev. C | Page 21 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
10  
0
10  
0
3.6V, –40°C  
1.8V, –40°C  
3.6V, +85°C  
1.8V, +85°C  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
PA RAMP = 4  
PA RAMP = 5  
PA RAMP = 6  
PA RAMP = 7  
0
5
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75  
TIME (µs)  
–250 –200 –150 –100 –50  
0
50  
100 150 200 250  
rev  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (kHz)  
Figure 17. PA Ramp-Up at Data Rate =300 kbps for Each PA_RAMP Setting,  
Differential PA  
Figure 20. Transmit Spectrum at 868 MHz, GFSK, Data Rate = 38.4 kbps,  
Frequency Deviation = 20 kHz (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V  
Operation Shown for Robustness)  
15  
10  
5
10  
0
3.6V, +25°C  
0
1.8V, +25°C  
–10  
–20  
3.6V, +85°C  
–5  
1.8V, +85°C  
3.6V, –40°C  
1.8V, –40°C  
–10  
–15  
–20  
–25  
–30  
–35  
–40  
–45  
PA RAMP = 4  
–30  
PA RAMP = 5  
PA RAMP = 6  
–40  
PA RAMP = 7  
–50  
–60  
0
5
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75  
TIME (µs)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (kHz)  
Figure 18. PA Ramp-Down at Data Rate =300 kbps for Each PA_RAMP  
Setting, Differential PA  
Figure 21. Transmit Spectrum at 928 MHz, GFSK, Data Rate = 300 kbps,  
Frequency Deviation = 75 kHz (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V  
Operation Shown for Robustness)  
30  
10  
3.6V, –40°C  
1.8V, –40°C  
3.6V, +85°C  
1.8V, +85°C  
0
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
20  
10  
0
–10  
–20  
–30  
–250 –200 –150 –100 –50  
0
50  
100 150 200 250  
0
0.25  
0.50  
0.75  
1.00  
1.25  
1.50  
1.75  
2.00  
TRANSMIT SYMBOL (Bits)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (kHz)  
Figure 22. Transmit Eye at 868 MHz, GFSK, Data Rate = 38.4 kbps, Frequency  
Deviation = 21 kHz  
Figure 19. Transmit Spectrum at 868 MHz, FSK, Data Rate = 38.4 kbps,  
Frequency Deviation = 20 kHz (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V  
Operation Shown for Robustness)  
Rev. C | Page 22 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
100  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
+25°C, 1.8V  
75  
+85°C, 1.8V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
+85°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 3.6V  
50  
25  
0
–25  
–50  
–75  
–100  
860  
870  
880  
890  
900  
910  
920  
930  
940  
0
0.25  
0.50  
0.75  
1.00  
1.25  
1.50  
1.75  
2.00  
RF TRANSMIT FREQUENCY (MHz)  
TRANSMIT SYMBOL (Bits)  
Figure 26. Modulation Error Ratio (MER) vs. RF Frequency, Temperature, and  
DD at Modulation Index = 1 and Data Rate = 10 kbps (Minimum  
Figure 23. Transmit Eye at 868 MHz, GFSK, Data Rate = 300 kbps, Frequency  
Deviation = 75 kHz  
V
Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V Operation Shown for Robustness)  
30  
20  
10  
RF FREQUENCY = 868MHz  
RF FREQUENCY = 928MHz  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
0
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
130kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
174kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
223kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
304kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
381kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
18  
17  
16  
–2.5 –2.0 –1.5 –1.0 –0.5  
0
0.5  
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
10.0 49.5 49.6 129.5 129.6 179.1 179.2 239.9 240.0 300.0  
DATA RATE (kbps)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (MHz)  
Figure 27. Modulation Error Ratio (MER) vs. Data Rate, Synthesizer Loop  
Bandwidth, and RF Frequency at Modulation Index = 0.5  
Figure 24. OOK Transmit Spectrum, Max Hold for 100 Sweeps, Single-Ended  
PA, 868.95 MHz, Data Rate = 16.4 kbps (32.8 kcps, Manchester Encoded),  
PA_RAMP = 1  
32  
34  
RF FREQUENCY = 868MHz  
33  
+25°C, 1.8V  
+85°C, 1.8V  
–40°C, 1.8V  
+25°C, 3.6V  
31  
RF FREQUENCY = 928MHz  
32  
30  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
+85°C, 3.6V  
–40°C, 3.6V  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
130kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
174kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
223kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
304kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
381kHz  
SYNTH  
BANDWIDTH  
24  
23  
22  
860  
870  
880  
890  
900  
910  
920  
930  
940  
10.0 49.5 49.6 129.5 129.6 179.1 179.2 239.9 240.0 300.0  
RF TRANSMIT FREQUENCY (MHz)  
DATA RATE (kbps)  
Figure 28. Modulation Error Ratio (MER) vs. RF Frequency, Temperature, and  
DD at Modulation Index = 0.5 and Data Rate = 10 kbps  
Figure 25. Modulation Error Ratio (MER) vs. Data Rate, Synthesizer Loop  
Bandwidth, and RF Frequency at Modulation Index = 1  
V
Rev. C | Page 23 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
5
20  
10  
0
0
–5  
OUTPUT POWER (FUNDAMENTAL)  
OUTPUT POWER IDEAL  
P1dB  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–10  
–15  
–20  
–25  
–30  
–35  
IIP3 = –12.2dBm  
FUNDAMENTAL TONE  
IM3 TONE  
FUNDAMENTAL 1/1 SLOPE FIT  
IM3 3/1 SLOPE FIT  
P1dB = –21dBm  
–40  
–40  
–50  
–45  
–40  
–35  
–30  
–25  
–20  
–15  
–10  
–35  
–30  
–25  
–20  
–15  
LNA INPUT POWER (dBm)  
LNA INPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 32. LNA/Mixer IIP3, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature = 25°C, RF Frequency =  
915 MHz, LNA Gain = High, Mixer Gain = High, Source 1 Frequency = (915 +  
0.4) MHz, Source 2 Frequency = (915+ 0.7) MHz  
Figure 29. LNA/Mixer 1 dB Compression Point, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature =  
25°C, RF Frequency = 915 MHz, LNA Gain = Low, Mixer Gain = Low  
10  
20  
100kHz  
0
OUTPUT POWER (FUNDAMENTAL)  
OUTPUT POWER IDEAL  
P1dB  
150kHz  
15  
10  
5
200kHz  
300kHz  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
0
–5  
–10  
P1dB = –21.9dBm  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
–40  
–35  
–30  
–25  
–20  
–15  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (MHz)  
LNA INPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 33. IF Filter Profile vs. IF Bandwidth, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature = 25°C  
Figure 30. LNA/Mixer 1 dB Compression Point, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature =  
25°C, RF Frequency = 915 MHz, LNA Gain = High, Mixer Gain = High  
10  
10  
0
1.8V, –40°C  
2.4V, –40°C  
3.0V, –40°C  
3.6V, –40°C  
1.8V, +25°C  
2.4V, +25°C  
3.0V, +25°C  
3.6V, +25°C  
1.8V, +85°C  
2.4V, +85°C  
3.0V, +85°C  
3.6V, +85°C  
0
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
IIP3 = –11.5dBm  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
FUNDAMENTAL TONE  
IM3 TONE  
FUNDAMENTAL 1/1 SLOPE FIT  
IM3 3/1 SLOPE FIT  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
–50  
–45  
–40  
–35  
–30  
–25  
–20  
–15  
–10  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (MHz)  
LNA INPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 34. IF Filter Profile vs. VDD and Temperature, 100 kHz IF Filter  
Bandwidth (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V, 1.8 V Operation Shown for  
Robustness)  
Figure 31. LNA/Mixer IIP3, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature = 25°C, RF Frequency =  
915 MHz, LNA Gain = Low, Mixer Gain = Low, Source 1 Frequency =  
(915 + 0.4) MHz, Source 2 Frequency = (915+ 0.7) MHz  
Rev. C | Page 24 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
80  
70  
60  
MODULATED  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
INTERFERER  
CARRIER WAVE  
INTERFERER  
–10  
–10  
–60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60  
BLOCKER FREQUENCY OFFSET (MHz)  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 35. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 433 MHz, Data Rate = 38.4 kbps  
Figure 38. Receiver Wideband Blocking to 60 MHz, at 868 MHz,  
Data Rate = 38.4 kbps, Carrier Wave Interferer  
80  
70  
60  
80  
70  
60  
50  
50  
MODULATED  
MODULATED  
INTERFERER  
CARRIER WAVE  
40  
30  
INTERFERER  
40  
CARRIER WAVE  
INTERFERER  
INTERFERER  
30  
20  
20  
10  
10  
0
0
–10  
–20  
–10  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
BLOCKER FREQUENCY OFFSET (MHz)  
Figure 36. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 433 MHz, Data Rate = 100 kbps  
Figure 39. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 868 MHz, Data Rate = 100 kbps  
70  
60  
50  
40  
70  
60  
50  
40  
MODULATED  
INTERFERER  
MODULATED  
30  
30  
CARRIER WAVE  
INTERFERER  
CARRIER WAVE  
INTERFERER  
INTERFERER  
20  
20  
10  
0
10  
0
–10  
–20  
–10  
–20  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 37. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 433 MHz, Data Rate = 300 kbps  
Figure 40. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 868 MHz, Data Rate = 300 kbps  
Rev. C | Page 25 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
MODULATED  
INTERFERER  
CARRIER WAVE  
INTERFERER  
+25°C 1.8V  
+25°C 3.0V  
+25°C 3.6V  
+85°C 1.8V  
+85°C 3.0V  
+85°C 3.6V  
–40°C 1.8V  
–40°C 3.0V  
–40°C 3.6V  
–10  
–20  
–10  
–60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60  
INTERFERER FREQUENCY OFFSET (MHz)  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 41. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 38.4 kbps  
Figure 44. Receiver Wideband Blocking vs. VDD and Temperature,  
915 MHz, Data Rate = 300 kbps  
80  
70  
60  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
50  
MODULATED  
40  
INTERFERER  
CARRIER WAVE  
INTERFERER  
30  
20  
10  
0
–90  
GFSK, 100kHz IF BANDWIDTH  
GFSK, 200kHz IF BANDWIDTH  
2FSK, 100kHz IF BANDWIDTH  
–10  
–20  
–100  
–110  
–60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
BLOCKER FREQUENCY OFFSET (MHz)  
Figure 42. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 100 kbps  
Figure 45. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 868 MHz, Data Rate = 38.4 kbps,  
Measured as per ETSI EN 300 220  
70  
60  
50  
65  
60  
55  
50  
45  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
40  
MODULATED  
INTERFERER  
30  
CARRIER WAVE  
INTERFERER  
20  
10  
0
0
–5  
–10  
–10  
–20  
CW INTERFERER  
–15  
–20  
MODULATED INTERFERER  
–2.0 –1.6 –1.2 –0.8 –0.4  
0
0.4  
0.8  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 43. Receiver Wideband Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 300 kbps  
Figure 46. Receiver Close-In Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 50 kbps,  
IF Filter Bandwidth = 100 kHz, Image Calibrated  
Rev. C | Page 26 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
60  
55  
50  
45  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
60  
55  
50  
45  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
0
–5  
–10  
–5  
–10  
–15  
–20  
CW INTERFERER  
MODULATED INTERFERER  
CW INTERFERER  
–15  
–20  
MODULATED INTERFERER  
–2.0 –1.6 –1.2 –0.8 –0.4  
0
0.4  
0.8  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
–2.0 –1.6 –1.2 –0.8 –0.4  
0
0.4  
0.8  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 47. Receiver Close-In Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 100 kbps,  
IF Filter Bandwidth = 100 kHz, Image Calibrated  
Figure 50. Receiver Close-In Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 300 kbps,  
IF Filter Bandwidth = 300 kHz, Image Calibrated  
60  
55  
50  
45  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
CALIBRATED  
UNCALIBRATED  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
0
–5  
–10  
CW INTERFERER  
–15  
MODULATED INTERFERER  
–20  
–1.0 –0.8 –0.6 –0.4 –0.2  
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1.0  
–2.0 –1.6 –1.2 –0.8 –0.4  
0
0.4  
0.8  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 48. Receiver Close-In Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 150 kbps,  
IF Filter Bandwidth = 150 kHz, Image Calibrated  
Figure 51. Image Attenuation with Calibrated and Uncalibrated Images,  
915 MHz, IF Filter Bandwidth = 100 kHz, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature = 25°C  
60  
55  
50  
45  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
CALIBRATED  
UNCALIBRATED  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
0
–5  
–10  
CW INTERFERER  
–15  
MODULATED INTERFERER  
–20  
–2.0 –1.6 –1.2 –0.8 –0.4  
0
0.4  
0.8  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
–1.0 –0.8 –0.6 –0.4 –0.2  
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1.0  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
INTERFERER OFFSET FROM RECEIVER LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 49. Receiver Close-In Blocking at 915 MHz, Data Rate = 200 kbps,  
IF Filter Bandwidth = 200 kHz, Image Calibrated  
Figure 52. Image Attenuation with Calibrated and Uncalibrated Images,  
433 MHz, IF Filter Bandwidth =100 kHz, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature = 25°C  
Rev. C | Page 27 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
0
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
1kbps  
100kHz BW  
10kbps  
38.4kbps  
50kbps  
100kbps  
200kbps  
300kbps  
150kHz BW  
200kHz BW  
300kHz BW  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–1.0 –0.8 –0.6 –0.4 –0.2  
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1.0  
–120 –110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10  
0
OFFSET FROM LO FREQUENCY (MHz)  
APPLIED RECEIVER POWER (dBm)  
Figure 53. IF Filter Profile with Calibrated Image vs. IF Filter Bandwidth,  
921 MHz, VDD= 3.0 V, Temperature = 25°C  
Figure 56. Packet Error Rate vs. RF Input Power and Data Rate, FSK/GFSK,  
928 MHz, Preamble Length = 64 Bits, VDD = 3.0 V, Temperature = 25°C  
–98  
–96.0  
–96.5  
915MHz, –40°C  
915MHz, +25°C  
915MHz, +85°C  
–99  
–100  
–101  
–102  
–103  
–104  
868MHz, –40°C  
868MHz, +25°C  
868MHz, +85°C  
–97.0  
+25°C  
+85°C  
–97.5  
–98.0  
–40°C  
–98.5  
–99.0  
–99.5  
–100.0  
1.8  
3.0  
(V)  
3.6  
1.8  
3.6  
V
V
(V)  
DD  
DD  
Figure 54. Receiver Sensitivity (Bit Error Rate at 1E − 3) vs. VDD, Temperature,  
and RF Frequency, Data Rate = 300 kbps, GFSK, Frequency Deviation =  
75 kHz, IF Bandwidth = 300 kHz  
Figure 57. Receiver Sensitivity (Packet Error Rate at 1%) vs. VDD,  
Temperature, and RF Frequency, Data Rate = 300 kbps, GFSK, Frequency  
Deviation = 75 kHz, IF Bandwidth = 300 kHz  
–95  
10  
BIT ERROR RATE (1E-3)  
PACKET ERROR RATE (1%)  
RS CODED DATA,  
SYNC_ERROR_TOL = 0,  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PREAMBLE_MATCH = 0xA  
–100  
RS CODED DATA,  
SYNC_ERROR_TOL = 1,  
PREAMBLE_MATCH = 0x0A  
UNCODED DATA,  
SYNC_ERROR_TOL = 0  
–105  
–110  
–115  
–120  
3.4dB  
2dB  
0
50  
100  
150  
200  
250  
300  
–104 –103 –102 –101 –100 –99 –98 –97 –96 –95 –94  
DATA RATE (kbps)  
RECEIVER INPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 55. Bit Error Rate Sensitivity (at BER = 1E − 3) and Packet Error Rate  
Sensitivity (at PER = 1%) vs. Data Rate, GFSK, VDD = 3.0 V,  
Temperature = 25°C  
Figure 58. Receiver PER Using Reed Solomon (RS) Coding; RF Frequency =  
915 MHz, GFSK, Data Rate = 300 kbps, Frequency Deviation =75 kHz, Packet  
Length = 28 Bytes (Uncoded); Reed Solomon Configuration: n = 38,  
k = 28, t =5  
Rev. C | Page 28 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
OOK MODULATION  
DEPTH = 60dB  
OOK MODULATION  
DEPTH = 40dB  
OOK MODULATION  
DEPTH = 30dB  
OOK MODULATION  
DEPTH = 20dB  
–110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10  
0
10  
–110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10  
0
10  
APPLIED POWER (dBm)  
APPLIED POWER (dBm)  
Figure 59. OOK Packet Error Rate vs. RF Input Power, Data Rate = 19.2 kbps  
(Chip Rate = 38.4 kcps, Manchester Encoded), IF Bandwidth = 100 kHz,  
Figure 62. OOK Packet Error Rate vs. RF Input Power and OOK Modulation  
Depth, Data Rate = 19.2 kbps (Chip Rate = 38.4 kcps, Manchester Encoded),  
IF Bandwidth = 100 kHz, VDD = 3.6 V, Temperature = 25°C, RF Frequency =  
902 MHz, Preamble Length = 100 Bits  
V
DD = 3.6 V, Temperature = 25°C, RF Frequency = 902 MHz,  
Preamble Length = 100 Bits  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
100kbps  
150kbps  
200kbps  
300kbps  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10  
APPLIED POWER (dBm)  
0
10  
RF FREQUENCY ERROR (kHz)  
Figure 60. OOK Packet Error Rate vs. RF Input Power, Data Rate = 2.4 kbps  
(Chip Rate = 4.8 kcps, Manchester Encoded), IF Bandwidth = 100 kHz,  
Figure 63. AFC On: Receiver Sensitivity (at PER = 1%) vs. RF Frequency Error,  
GFSK, 915 MHz, AFC Enabled (Ki = 7, Kp = 3), AFC Mode = Lock After  
Preamble, IF Bandwidth = 100 kHz (at 100 kbps), 150 kHz (at 150 kbps),  
200 kHz (at 200 kbps), and 300 kHz (at 300 kbps), Preamble Length = 64 Bits  
V
DD = 3.6 V, Temperature = 25°C, RF Frequency = 902 MHz,  
Preamble Length = 100 Bits  
>1%  
<1%  
5.0  
T
T
T
T
T
T
= –40°C, V = 1.8V  
DD  
2.00  
1.75  
A
A
A
A
A
A
= –40°C, V = 3.6V  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0
DD  
= +25°C, V = 1.8V  
DD  
1.50  
= +25°C, V = 3.6V  
DD  
1.25  
= +85°C, V = 1.8V  
DD  
1.00  
= +85°C, V = 3.6V  
DD  
0.75  
0.50  
0.25  
0
–0.25  
–0.50  
–0.75  
–1.00  
–1.25  
–1.50  
–1.75  
–2.00  
–106  
–105  
–104  
–103  
–102  
–101  
–40 –35 –30 –25 –20 –15 –10 –5  
0
5
10 15 20 25 30 35 40  
APPLIED POWER (dBm)  
RF FREQUENCY ERROR (kHz)  
Figure 61. OOK Packet Error Rate vs. RF Input Power, VDD, and Temperature,  
Data Rate = 19.2 kbps (Chip Rate = 38.4 kcps, Manchester Encoded),  
IF Bandwidth = 100 kHz, VDD = 3.6 V, Temperature = 25°C, RF Frequency =  
902 MHz, Preamble Length = 100 Bits (Minimum Recommended VDD = 2.2 V,  
1.8 V Operation Shown for Robustness)  
Figure 64. AFC Off: Packet Error Rate vs. RF Frequency Error and Data Rate  
Error, Data Rate = 300 kbps, Frequency Deviation = 75 kHz, GFSK,  
AGC_LOCK_MODE = Lock After Preamble  
Rev. C | Page 29 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
>1%  
<1%  
6
4
300kbps  
200kbps  
150kbps  
100kbps  
50kbps  
2.00  
1.75  
1.50  
1.25  
38.4kbps  
9.6kbps  
1.00  
2
0.75  
0.50  
0.25  
0
0
–0.25  
–0.50  
–0.75  
–1.00  
–1.25  
–1.50  
–1.75  
–2.00  
–2  
–4  
–6  
–120 –110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20  
–140–120–100 –80 –60 –40 –20  
0
20 40 60 80 100 120 140  
INPUT POWER (dBm)  
RF FREQUENCY ERROR (kHz)  
Figure 65. AFC On: Packet Error Rate vs. RF Frequency Error and Data Rate  
Error, Data Rate = 300 kbps, Frequency Deviation = 75 kHz, GFSK,  
AGC_LOCK_MODE = Lock After Preamble  
Figure 68. Mean RSSI Error (via Automatic End of Packet RSSI Measurement)  
vs. RF Input Power vs. Data Rate; RF Frequency = 868 MHz, GFSK, 100 RSSI  
Measurements at Each Input Power Level  
–20  
–30  
10  
8
–20  
–30  
10  
8
IDEAL RSSI  
MEAN RSSI  
MEAN RSSI  
(WITH POLYNOMIAL CORRECTION)  
–40  
6
–40  
6
–50  
4
–50  
4
–60  
2
–60  
2
–70  
0
–70  
0
–80  
–2  
–4  
–6  
–8  
–10  
–80  
–2  
–4  
–6  
–8  
–10  
–90  
–90  
IDEAL RSSI  
MEAN RSSI  
MEAN RSSI ERROR  
MAX POSITIVE RSSI ERROR  
MAX NEGATIVE RSSI ERROR  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–100  
–110  
–120  
MEAN RSSI ERROR  
MEAN RSSI ERROR  
(WITH POLYNOMIAL CORRECTION)  
–120 –110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20  
–120 –110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20  
INPUT POWER (dBm)  
INPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 66. RSSI (via CMD_GET_RSSI) vs. RF Input Power, 868 MHz, GFSK, Data  
Rate = 38.4 kbps, Frequency Deviation = 20 kHz, IF Bandwidth = 100 kHz,  
100 RSSI Measurements at Each Input Power Level  
Figure 69. RSSI With and Without Cosine Polynomial Correction (via  
Automatic End of Packet RSSI Measurement), 100 RSSI Measurements at  
Each Input Power Level  
–20  
–30  
10  
8
–20  
–30  
10  
8
IDEAL RSSI  
MEAN RSSI  
MEAN RSSI ERROR  
MAX POSITIVE RSSI ERROR  
MAX NEGATIVE RSSI ERROR  
IDEAL RSSI  
MEAN RSSI  
MEAN RSSI ERROR  
MAX POSITIVE RSSI ERROR  
MAX NEGATIVE RSSI ERROR  
–40  
6
–40  
6
–50  
4
–50  
4
–60  
2
–60  
2
–70  
0
–70  
0
–80  
–2  
–4  
–6  
–8  
–10  
–80  
–2  
–4  
–6  
–8  
–10  
–90  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–120 –110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20  
–120 –110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20  
INPUT POWER (dBm)  
INPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 67. RSSI (via Automatic End of Packet RSSI Measurement) vs. RF Input  
Power, 868 MHz, GFSK, Data Rate = 300 kbps, Frequency Deviation = 75 kHz,  
IF Bandwidth = 300 kHz, AGC_CLOCK_DIVIDE = 15, 100 RSSI Measurements  
at Each Input Power Level  
Figure 70. OOK RSSI and OOK RSSI Error vs. RF Input Power. 915 MHz, Data  
Rate = 19.2 kbps (38.4 kcps), 200 RSSI Measurements per Input Power Level  
Rev. C | Page 30 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
–20  
IDEAL RSSI  
1
1.8V @ 25°C  
3.6V @ 25°C  
1.8V @ 85°C  
3.6V @ 85°C  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
–120 –110 –100 –90 –80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20  
SAMPLE NUMBER  
INPUT POWER (dBm)  
Figure 71. OOK RSSI vs. RF Input Power, VDD, and Temperature,  
RF Frequency = 915 MHz, Data Rate = 19.2 kbps (38.4 kcps Manchester  
Encoded)  
Figure 73. Receiver Eye Diagram Measured Using the Test DAC.,  
RF Frequency = 915 MHz, RF Input Power = −80 dBm, Data Rate = 100 kbps,  
Frequency Deviation = 50 kHz  
80  
70  
1
60  
50  
MEAN ACCURACY  
40  
30  
20  
10  
ERROR  
0
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
–40 –30 –20 –10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80  
SAMPLE NUMBER  
APPLIED TEMPERATURE (°C)  
Figure 72. Typical Accuracy Range of Temperature Sensor vs. Applied  
Temperature, Calibration Performed at 25°C  
Figure 74. Receiver Eye Diagram Measured Using the Test DAC,  
RF Frequency = 915 MHz, RF Input Power = −105 dBm, Data Rate = 100 kbps,  
Frequency Deviation = 50 kHz  
Rev. C | Page 31 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
TERMINOLOGY  
ADC  
Analog to digital converter  
MSK  
Minimum shift keying  
AGC  
NOP  
Automatic gain control  
No operation  
AFC  
OOK  
Automatic frequency control  
On-off keying  
Battmon  
PA  
Battery monitor  
Power amplifier  
BBRAM  
PFD  
Battery backup random access memory  
Phase frequency detector  
CBC  
PHY  
Cipher block chaining  
Physical layer  
CRC  
RCO  
Cyclic redundancy check  
RC oscillator  
DR  
RISC  
Data rate  
Reduced instruction set computer  
ECB  
RSSI  
Electronic code book  
Receive signal strength indicator  
ECC  
Rx  
Error checking code  
Receive  
2FSK  
SAR  
Two-level frequency shift keying  
Successive approximation register  
GFSK  
SWM  
Two-level Gaussian frequency shift keying  
Smart wake mode  
GMSK  
Tx  
Gaussian minimum shift keying  
Transmit  
LO  
VCO  
Local oscillator  
Voltage controlled oscillator  
MAC  
WUC  
Media access control  
Wake-up controller  
MCR  
XOSC  
Modem configuration random access memory  
Crystal oscillator  
MER  
Modulation error rate  
Rev. C | Page 32 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
RADIO CONTROL  
The ADF7023 has five radio states designated PHY_SLEEP,  
PHY_OFF, PHY_ON, PHY_RX, and PHY_TX. The host processor  
can transition the ADF7023 between states by issuing single byte  
commands over the SPI interface. The various commands and  
states are illustrated in Figure 75. The communications processor  
handles the sequencing of various radio circuits and critical  
timing functions, thereby simplifying radio operation and  
easing the burden on the host processor.  
the CMD_PHY_TX command. The device automatically  
transmits the transmit packet stored in the packet RAM. After  
transmission of the packet, the PA is disabled and the device  
automatically returns to the PHY_ON state and can, optionally,  
generate an interrupt.  
In sport mode, the device transmits the data present on the GP2  
pin as described in the Sport section. The host processor must  
issue the CMD_PHY_ON command to exit the PHY_TX state  
when in sport mode.  
RADIO STATES  
PHY_SLEEP  
PHY_RX  
In this state, the device is in a low power sleep mode. To enter  
the state, issue the CMD_PHY_SLEEP command, either from  
the PHY_OFF or PHY_ON state. To wake the radio from the  
In the PHY_RX state, the synthesizer is enabled and calibrated.  
The ADC, RSSI, IF filter, mixer, and LNA are enabled. The radio  
is in receive mode on the channel frequency defined by the  
CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0] setting (Address 0x109 to  
Address 0x10B).  
CS  
state, set the pin low, or use the wake-up controller (32.768 kHz  
RC or 32.768 kHz crystal) to wake the radio from this state. The  
wake-up timer should be set up before entering the PHY_SLEEP  
state. If retention of BBRAM contents is not required, Deep Sleep  
Mode 2 can be used to further reduce the PHY_SLEEP state  
current consumption. Deep Sleep Mode 2 is entered by issuing the  
CMD_HW_RESET command. The options for the PHY_SLEEP  
state are detailed in Table 10. When in PHY_SLEEP, the IRQ_GP3  
interrupt pin is held at logic low while the other GPx pins are in  
a high impedance state.  
After reception of a valid packet, the device returns to the  
PHY_ON state and can, optionally, generate an interrupt. In  
sport mode, the device remains in the PHY_RX state until the  
CMD_PHY_ON command is issued.  
Current Consumption  
The typical current consumption in each state is detailed in  
Table 10.  
PHY_OFF  
Table 10. Current Consumption in ADF7023 Radio States  
In the PHY_OFF state, the 26 MHz crystal, the digital regulator,  
and the synthesizer regulator are powered up. All memories are  
fully accessible. The BBRAM registers must be valid before  
exiting this state.  
Current  
(Typical)  
State  
Conditions  
PHY_SLEEP  
(Deep Sleep  
Mode 2)  
0.18 µA  
Wake-up timer off, BBRAM  
contents not retained, entered by  
issuing CMD_HW_RESET  
PHY_ON  
PHY_SLEEP  
(Deep Sleep  
Mode 1)  
0.33 µA  
0.75 µA  
1.28 µA  
Wake-up timer off, BBRAM  
contents retained  
In the PHY_ON state, along with the crystal, the digital regulator  
and the synthesizer regulator, VCO, and RF regulators are  
powered up. A baseband filter calibration is performed when  
this state is entered from the PHY_OFF state if the BB_CAL bit  
in the MODE_CONTROL register (Address 0x11A) is set. The  
device is ready to operate, and the PHY_TX and PHY_RX  
states can be entered.  
PHY_SLEEP  
(RCO Mode )  
Wake-up timer on using a 32 kHz  
RC oscillator, BBRAM contents  
retained  
PHY_SLEEP  
(XTO Mode )  
Wake-up timer on using a 32 kHz  
XTAL oscillator, BBRAM contents  
retained  
PHY_OFF  
PHY_ON  
PHY_TX  
PHY_RX  
1.0 mA  
1.0 mA  
24.1 mA  
12.8 mA  
PHY_TX  
In the PHY_TX state, the synthesizer is enabled and calibrated.  
The power amplifier is enabled, and the device transmits at the  
channel frequency defined by the CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0] setting  
(Address 0x109 to Address 0x10B). The state is entered by issuing  
10 dBm, single-ended PA, 868 MHz  
Rev. C | Page 33 of 112  
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
COLD START  
(BATTERY APPLIED)  
WUC TIMEOUT  
CMD_HW_RESET  
(FROM ANY STATE)  
CS LOW  
CMD_CONFIG_DEV  
PHY_OFF  
PHY_SLEEP  
CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
CONFIGURE  
CMD_RAM_LOAD_INIT  
CMD_RAM_LOAD_DONE  
PROGRAM RAM  
CONFIG  
2
PROGRAM RAM  
4
CMD_AES  
CMD_BB_CAL  
CMD_CONFIG_DEV  
CMD_GET_RSSI  
AES  
IF FILTER CAL  
CONFIGURE  
CMD_IR_CAL  
IR CALIBRATION  
REED-SOLOMON  
PHY_ON  
5
CMD_RS  
MEASURE RSSI  
3
3
RX_EOF  
TX_EOF  
1
1
RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
PHY_TX  
PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_TX  
CMD_PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_TX  
CMD_PHY_RX  
1
TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE AUTOMATIC TURNAROUND MUST BE ENABLED BY BITS RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND AND  
TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND (0x11A: MODE_CONTROL).  
2
AES ENCRYPTION/DECRYPTION, IMAGE REJECTION CALIBRATION, AND REED SOLOMON CODING ARE AVAILABLE ONLY IF THE NECESSARY  
FIRMWARE MODULE HAS BEEN DOWNLOADED TO THE PROGRAM RAM.  
3
4
5
THE END OF FRAME (EOF) AUTOMATIC TRANSITIONS ARE DISABLED IN SPORT MODE.  
CMD_AES REFERS TO THE THREE AVAILABLE AES COMMANDS: CMD_AES_ENCRYPT, CMD_AES_DECRYPT, AND CMD_AES_DECRYPT_INIT.  
CMD_RS REFERS TO THE THREE AVAILABLE REED SOLOMON COMMANDS: CMD_RS_ENCODE_INIT, CMD_RS_ENCODE,  
AND CMD_RS_DECODE.  
KEY  
TRANSITION INITIATED BY HOST PROCESSOR  
AUTOMATIC TRANSITION BY COMMUNICATIONS PROCESSOR  
COMMUNICATIONS PROCESSOR FUNCTION  
DOWNLOADABLE FIRMWARE MODULE STORED ON PROGRAM RAM  
RADIO STATE  
Figure 75. Radio State Diagram  
Rev. C | Page 34 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Initialization After a WUC Timeout  
INITIALIZATION  
The ADF7023 can autonomously wake from the PHY_SLEEP  
state using the wake-up controller. If the ADF7023 wakes after a  
WUC timeout in smart wake mode (SWM), it follows the SWM  
routine based on the smart wake mode configuration in BBRAM  
(see the Low Power Modes section). If the ADF7023 wakes after  
a WUC timeout with SWM disabled and the firmware timer  
disabled, it wakes in the PHY_OFF state, and the following is  
the procedure that the host processor is required to follow:  
Initialization After Application of Power  
When power is applied to the ADF7023 (through the VDDBAT1/  
VDDBAT2 pins), it registers a power-on reset event (POR) and  
transitions to the PHY_OFF state. The BBRAM memory is  
unknown, the packet RAM memory is cleared to 0x00, and the  
MCR memory is reset to its default values. The host processor  
should use the following procedure to complete the initialization  
sequence:  
1. Poll status word and wait for the CMD_READY bit to go high.  
2. Issue the CMD_CONFIG_DEV command so that the  
radio settings are updated using the BBRAM values.  
CS  
1. Bring the  
pin of the SPI low and wait until the MISO  
output goes high.  
2. Poll status word and wait for the CMD_READY bit to go high.  
3. Configure the part by writing to all 64 of the BBRAM  
registers.  
4. Issue the CMD_CONFIG_DEV command so that the  
radio settings are updated using the BBRAM values.  
The ADF7023 is now configured in the PHY_OFF state.  
COMMANDS  
The commands that are supported by the radio controller are  
detailed in this section. They initiate transitions between radio  
states or perform tasks as indicated in Figure 75.  
The ADF7023 is now configured in the PHY_OFF state.  
Initialization After Issuing the CMD_HW_RESET  
Command  
CMD_PHY_OFF (0xB0)  
This command transitions the ADF7023 to the PHY_OFF state.  
It can be issued in the PHY_ON state. It powers down the RF  
and VCO regulators.  
The CMD_HW_RESET command performs a full power-down  
of all hardware, and the device enters the PHY_SLEEP state. To  
complete the hardware reset, the host processor should complete  
the following procedure:  
CMD_PHY_ON (0xB1)  
This command transitions the ADF7023 to the PHY_ON state.  
1. Wait for 1 ms.  
If the command is issued in the PHY_OFF state, it powers up  
the RF and VCO regulators and performs an IF filter calibration  
if the BB_CAL bit is set in the MODE_CONTROL register  
(Address 0x11A).  
CS  
2. Bring the  
pin of the SPI low and wait until the MISO  
output goes high. The ADF7023 registers a POR and enters  
the PHY_OFF state.  
3. Poll status word and wait for the CMD_READY bit to go high.  
4. Configure the part by writing to all 64 of the BBRAM  
registers.  
If the command is issued from the PHY_TX state, the host  
processor performs the following procedure:  
5. Issue the CMD_CONFIG_DEV command so that the  
radio settings are updated using the BBRAM values.  
1. Ramp down the PA.  
2. Set the external PA signal low (if enabled).  
3. Turn off the digital transmit clocks.  
4. Power down the synthesizer.  
5. Set FW_STATE = PHY_ON.  
The ADF7023 is now configured in the PHY_OFF state.  
CS  
Initialization on Transitioning from PHY_SLEEP (After  
Is Brought Low)  
If the command is issued from the PHY_RX state, the  
communications processor performs the following procedure:  
CS  
The host processor can bring  
low at any time to wake  
the ADF7023 from the PHY_SLEEP state. This event is not  
registered as a POR event because the BBRAM contents are  
valid. The following is the procedure that the host processor is  
required to follow:  
1. Copy the measured RSSI to the RSSI_READBACK register.  
2. Set the external LNA signal low (if enabled).  
3. Turn off the digital receiver clocks.  
4. Power down the synthesizer and the receiver circuitry  
(ADC, RSSI, IF filter, mixer, and LNA).  
5. Set FW_STATE = PHY_ON.  
CS  
1. Bring the  
line of the SPI low and wait until the MISO  
output goes high. The ADF7023 enters the PHY_OFF state.  
2. Poll status word and wait for the CMD_READY bit to go high.  
3. Issue the CMD_CONFIG_DEV command so that the  
radio settings are updated using the BBRAM values.  
The ADF7023 is now configured and ready to transition to the  
PHY_ON state.  
Rev. C | Page 35 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
CMD_PHY_SLEEP (0xBA)  
CMD_PHY_TX (0xB5)  
This command transitions the ADF7023 to the very low power  
PHY_SLEEP state in which the WUC is operational (if enabled),  
and the BBRAM contents are retained. It can be issued from  
the PHY_OFF or PHY_ON state.  
This command can be issued in the PHY_ON, PHY_TX, or  
PHY_RX state. If the command is issued in the PHY_ON state,  
the communications processor performs the following procedure:  
1. Power up the synthesizer.  
CMD_PHY_RX (0xB2)  
2. Set the RF channel based on the CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0]  
setting in BBRAM.  
3. Set the synthesizer bandwidth.  
4. Do VCO calibration.  
5. Delay for synthesizer settling.  
6. Enable the digital transmit blocks.  
7. Set the external PA enable signal high (if enabled).  
8. Ramp up the PA.  
This command can be issued in the PHY_ON, PHY_RX, or  
PHY_TX state. If the command is issued in the PHY_ON state,  
the communications processor performs the following  
procedure:  
1. Power up the synthesizer.  
2. Power up the receiver circuitry (ADC, RSSI, IF filter,  
mixer, and LNA).  
3. Set the RF channel based on the CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0]  
setting in BBRAM.  
9. Set FW_STATE = PHY_TX.  
10. Transmit data.  
If the command is issued in the PHY_TX state, the communi-  
cations processor performs the following procedure:  
4. Set the synthesizer bandwidth.  
5. Do VCO calibration.  
6. Delay for synthesizer settling.  
7. Enable the digital receiver blocks.  
8. Set the external LNA enable signal high (if enabled).  
9. Set FW_STATE = PHY_RX.  
1. Ramp down the PA.  
2. Set the external PA enable signal low (if enabled).  
3. Turn off the digital transmit blocks.  
4. Set the RF channel based on the CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0]  
setting in BBRAM.  
5. Set the synthesizer bandwidth.  
6. Do VCO calibration.  
7. Delay for synthesizer settling.  
8. Enable the digital transmit blocks.  
9. Set the external PA enable signal high (if enabled).  
10. Ramp up the PA.  
11. Set FW_STATE = PHY_TX.  
12. Transmit data.  
If the command is issued in the PHY_RX state, the  
communications processor performs the following procedure:  
1. Set the external LNA signal low (if enabled).  
2. Unlock the AFC and AGC.  
3. Turn off the receive blocks.  
4. Set the RF channel based on the CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0]  
setting in BBRAM.  
5. Set the synthesizer bandwidth.  
6. Do VCO calibration.  
If the command is issued in the PHY_RX state, the communi-  
cations processor performs the following procedure:  
7. Delay for synthesizer settling.  
8. Enable the digital receiver blocks.  
9. Set the external LNA enable signal high (if enabled).  
10. Set FW_STATE = PHY_RX.  
1. Set the external LNA signal low (if enabled).  
2. Unlock the AFC and AGC.  
3. Turn off the receive blocks.  
4. Power down the receiver circuitry (ADC, RSSI, IF filter,  
mixer, and LNA).  
5. Set the RF channel based on the CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0]  
setting in BBRAM.  
6. Set the synthesizer bandwidth.  
7. Delay for synthesizer settling.  
8. Enable the digital transmit blocks.  
9. Set the external PA enable signal high (if enabled).  
10. Ramp up the PA.  
If the command is issued in the PHY_TX state, the  
communications processor performs the following procedure:  
1. Ramp down the PA.  
2. Set the external PA signal low (if enabled).  
3. Turn off the digital transmit blocks.  
4. Power up the receiver circuitry (ADC, RSSI, IF filter,  
mixer, and LNA).  
5. Set the RF channel based on the CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0]  
setting in BBRAM.  
6. Set the synthesizer bandwidth.  
7. Do VCO calibration.  
11. Set FW_STATE = PHY_TX.  
12. Transmit data.  
8. Delay for synthesizer settling.  
9. Enable the digital receiver blocks.  
10. Set the external LNA enable signal high (if enabled).  
11. Set FW_STATE = PHY_RX  
Rev. C | Page 36 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
CMD_CONFIG_DEV (0xBB)  
CMD_RAM_LOAD_DONE (0xC7)  
This command interprets the BBRAM contents and configures  
each of the radio parameters based on these contents. It can be  
issued from the PHY_OFF or PHY_ON state. The only radio  
parameter that isn’t configured on this command is the  
CHANNEL_FREQ[23:0] setting, which instead is configured  
as part of a CMD_PHY_TX or CMD_PHY_RX command.  
This command is required only after download of a software  
module to program RAM. It indicates to the communications  
processor that a software module is loaded to program RAM.  
The CMD_RAM_LOAD_DONE command can be issued only  
in the PHY_OFF state. The command resets the communications  
processor and the packet RAM.  
The user should write to the entire 64 bytes of the BBRAM and  
then issue the CMD_CONFIG_DEV command, which can be  
issued in the PHY_OFF or PHY_ON state.  
CMD_IR_CAL (0xBD)  
This command performs a fully automatic image rejection  
calibration on the ADF7023 receiver.  
CMD_GET_RSSI (0xBC)  
This command requires that the IR calibration firmware module  
has been loaded to the ADF7023 program RAM. The firmware  
module is available from Analog Devices. For more information,  
see the Downloadable Firmware Modules section.  
This command turns on the receiver, performs an RSSI  
measurement on the current channel, and returns the ADF7023  
to the PHY_ON state. The command can be issued from the  
PHY_ON state. The RSSI result is saved to the RSSI_READBACK  
register (Address 0x312). This command can be issued from the  
PHY_ON state only.  
CMD_AES_ENCRYPT (0xD0), CMD_AES_DECRYPT  
(0xD2), and CMD_AES_DECRYPT_INIT (0xD1)  
These commands allow AES, 128-bit block encryption and  
decryption of transmit and receive data using key sizes of  
128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits.  
CMD_BB_CAL (0xBE)  
This command performs an IF filter calibration. It can be  
issued only in the PHY_ON state. In many cases, it may not be  
necessary to use this command because an IF filter calibration  
is automatically performed on the PHY_OFF to PHY_ON  
transition if BB_CAL = 1 in the MODE_CONTROL register  
(Address 0x11A).  
The AES commands require that the AES firmware module has  
been loaded to the ADF7023 program RAM. The AES firmware  
module is available from Analog Devices. See the Downloadable  
Firmware Modules section for details on the AES encryption  
and decryption module.  
CMD_HW_RESET (0xC8)  
CMD_RS_ENCODE_INIT (0xD1), CMD_RS_ENCODE  
(0xD0), and CMD_RS_DECODE (0xD2)  
The command performs a full power-down of all hardware,  
and the device enters the PHY_SLEEP state. This command  
can be issued in any state and is independent of the state of the  
communications processor. The procedure for initialization of  
the device after a CMD_HW_RESET command is described in  
detail in the Initialization section.  
These commands perform Reed Solomon encoding and decoding  
of transmit and receive data, thereby allowing detection and  
correction of errors in the received packet.  
These commands require that the Reed Solomon firmware  
module has been loaded to the ADF7023 program RAM. The  
Reed Solomon firmware module is available from Analog Devices.  
See the Downloadable Firmware Modules section for details on  
this module.  
CMD_RAM_LOAD_INIT (0xBF)  
This command prepares the communications processor for a  
subsequent download of a software module to program RAM.  
This command should be issued only prior to the program  
RAM being written to by the host processor.  
AUTOMATIC STATE TRANSITIONS  
On certain events, the communications processor can  
automatically transition the ADF7023 between states. These  
automatic transitions are illustrated as dashed lines in Figure 75  
and are explained in this section.  
Rev. C | Page 37 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
TX_EOF  
TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
The communications processor automatically transitions the  
device from the PHY_TX state to the PHY_ON state at the end  
of a packet transmission. On the transition, the communications  
processor performs the following actions:  
If the TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND bit in the MODE_  
CONTROL register (Address 0x11A) is enabled, the device  
automatically transitions to the PHY_RX state at the end of a  
packet transmission, on the same RF channel frequency. On the  
transition, the communications processor performs the  
following actions:  
1. Ramps down the PA.  
2. Sets the external PA signal low.  
3. Disables the digital transmitter blocks.  
4. Powers down the synthesizer.  
5. Sets FW_STATE = PHY_ON.  
1. Ramps down the PA.  
2. Sets the external PA signal low.  
3. Disables the digital transmitter blocks.  
4. Powers up the receiver circuitry (ADC, RSSI, IF filter,  
mixer, and LNA).  
5. Sets the RF channel (same as the previous transmit channel  
frequency).  
RX_EOF  
The communications processor automatically transitions the  
device from the PHY_RX state to the PHY_ON state at the end  
of a packet reception. On the transition, the communications  
processor performs the following actions:  
6. Sets the synthesizer bandwidth.  
7. Does VCO calibration.  
8. Delays for synthesizer settling.  
9. Turns on AGC and AFC (if enabled).  
10. Enables the digital receiver blocks.  
11. Sets the external LNA signal high (if enabled).  
12. Sets FW_STATE = PHY_RX.  
1. Copies the measured RSSI to the RSSI_READBACK  
register (Address 0x312).  
2. Sets the external LNA signal low.  
3. Disables the digital receiver blocks.  
4. Powers down the synthesizer and the receiver circuitry  
(ADC, RSSI, IF filter, mixer, and LNA).  
5. Sets FW_STATE = PHY_ON.  
In sport mode, the TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
transition is disabled.  
RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
WUC Timeout  
If the RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND bit in the MODE_  
CONTROL register (Address 0x11A) is enabled, the device  
automatically transitions to the PHY_TX state at the end of a  
valid packet reception, on the same RF channel frequency. On  
the transition, the communications processor performs the  
following actions:  
The ADF7023 can use the WUC to wake from sleep on a timeout  
of the hardware timer. The device wakes into the PHY_OFF  
state. See the WUC Mode section for further details.  
STATE TRANSITION AND COMMAND TIMING  
The execution times for all radio state transitions are detailed in  
Table 11 and Table 12. Note that these times are typical and can  
vary, depending on the BBRAM configuration.  
1. Sets the external LNA signal low.  
2. Unlocks the AGC and AFC (if enabled).  
3. Disables the digital receiver blocks.  
4. Powers down the receiver circuitry (ADC, RSSI, IF filter,  
mixer, and LNA).  
5. Sets RF channel frequency (same as the previous receive  
channel frequency).  
6. Sets the synthesizer bandwidth.  
7. Does VCO calibration.  
For normal transition times, set TRANSITION_CLOCK_DIV  
(Location 0x13A) to 0x04. For fast transition times, set  
TRANSITION_CLOCK_DIV to 0x01. It is recommended to  
enable fast transition times to reduce system power consumption.  
As stated in the SPI Interface section, commands are executed on  
the last positive SCLK edge of the command. For the values  
given in Table 11 and Table 12, there is an additional 200 ns  
CS  
8. Delays for synthesizer settling.  
9. Enables the digital transmitter blocks.  
10. Sets the external PA signal high (if enabled).  
11. Ramps up the PA.  
between the last positive SCLK edge and the rising edge of  
that is related to the SPI rate used.  
12. Sets FW_STATE = PHY_TX.  
13. Transmits data.  
In sport mode, the RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
transition is disabled.  
Rev. C | Page 38 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 11. ADF7023 Command Execution Times and State Transition Times That Are Not Related to PHY_TX or PHY_RX  
Normal Fast  
Transition Transition  
Command  
Initiated By State  
Present  
Time (µs),  
Typical  
Time (μs)  
Typical  
Command/Bit  
Next State  
Condition  
CMD_HW_RESET  
CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
CMD_PHY_OFF  
Host  
Host  
Host  
Host  
Any  
PHY_SLEEP  
PHY_SLEEP 22.3  
PHY_SLEEP 24.1  
1
1
PHY_OFF  
PHY_ON  
PHY_ON  
22.3  
24.1  
11  
PHY_OFF  
24  
CS  
From rising edge of to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt  
CMD_PHY_ON  
Host  
PHY_OFF  
PHY_ON  
258/73  
213/28  
CS  
From rising edge of to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt; IF filter  
calibration enabled/disabled  
CMD_GET_RSSI  
CMD_CONFIG_DEV  
CMD_CONFIG_DEV  
CMD_BB_CAL  
Host  
PHY_ON  
PHY_OFF  
PHY_ON  
PHY_ON  
PHY_ON  
PHY_OFF  
PHY_ON  
PHY_ON  
631/450  
72  
523/353  
23  
RSSI_WAIT_TIME (Address 0x138) =  
0xA7/0x37  
Host  
CS  
From rising edge of to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt  
Host  
75.5  
221  
24.5  
204  
CS  
From rising edge of to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt  
Host  
CS  
From rising edge of to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt  
Wake-Up from PHY_SLEEP,  
(WUC Timeout)  
Wake-Up from PHY_SLEEP,  
(CS Low)  
Automatic  
Host  
PHY_SLEEP PHY_OFF  
PHY_SLEEP PHY_OFF  
304  
304  
7 pF load capacitance, TA = 25°C  
304  
304  
7 pF load capacitance, TA = 25°C  
7 pF load capacitance, TA = 25°C  
Cold Start  
Application N/A  
of power  
PHY_OFF  
304  
304  
Table 12. ADF7023 State Transition Times Related to PHY_TX and PHY_RX  
Fast  
Command/Bit/  
Automatic  
Transition  
Normal Transition  
Transition  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
Present  
State  
Next  
State  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
,
,
Mode  
Condition  
Packet  
CMD_PHY_ON  
PHY_TX  
PHY_ON  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt  
T
T
EOP + TPARAMP_DOWN  
BYTE + 43  
+
TEOP +  
TPARAMP_DOWN  
TBYTE + 15  
+
Packet  
CMD_PHY_ON  
PHY_RX  
PHY_ON  
TBYTE + 48  
50.5  
TBYTE + 21  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
search for preamble  
23  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
preamble qualification  
50.5  
23  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
sync word qualification  
TEOP + 62.5  
TEOP + 18  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
RX data (after a sync word)  
Rev. C | Page 39 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Fast  
Command/Bit/  
Automatic  
Transition  
Normal Transition  
Transition  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
Present  
State  
Next  
State  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
,
,
Mode  
Condition  
Packet  
CMD_PHY_TX  
PHY_ON  
PHY_TX  
306  
237  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt; PA ramp up starts 3.4 µs after the  
interrupt; first bit of user data is transmitted  
1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs following the interrupt  
Packet  
CMD_PHY_TX  
PHY_RX  
PHY_TX  
TBYTE + 324.5  
TBYTE + 248  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
search for preamble; PA ramp up starts  
3.4 µs after the interrupt; first bit of user  
data is transmitted 1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs  
following the interrupt  
322.5  
245.5  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
preamble qualification; PA ramp up starts  
3.4 µs after the interrupt; first bit of user  
data is transmitted 1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs  
following the interrupt  
322.5  
245.5  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
sync word qualification; PA ramp up  
starts 3.4 µs after the interrupt; first bit of  
user data is transmitted 1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs  
following the interrupt  
TEOP + 281  
TEOP + 263  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
RX data (after a sync word); PA ramp up  
starts 3.4 µs after the interrupt; first bit of  
user data is transmitted 1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs  
following the interrupt  
Packet  
Packet  
CMD_PHY_TX  
PHY_TX  
PHY_TX  
PHY_TX  
TEOP + TPARAMP_DOWN  
TBYTE + 310  
+
TEOP  
TPARAMP_DOWN  
BYTE + 236  
+
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
+
interrupt. CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
packet transmission; PA ramp up starts  
3.4 µs after the interrupt; first bit of user  
data is transmitted 1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs  
following the interrupt  
T
RX_TO_TX_AUTO PHY_RX  
_TURNAROUND  
322  
327  
234.2  
241  
From INTERRUPT_CRC_CORRECT to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt; PA ramp up  
starts 3.4 µs after the interrupt; first bit of  
user data is transmitted 1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs  
following the interrupt  
Packet  
Packet  
CMD_PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_RX  
PHY_ON  
PHY_TX  
PHY_RX  
PHY_RX  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
T
T
EOP + TPARAMP_DOWN  
BYTE + 336  
+
TEOP +  
TPARAMP_DOWN  
TBYTE + 241  
interrupt; CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
packet transmission  
+
Packet  
CMD_PHY_RX  
PHY_RX  
PHY_RX  
TBYTE + 341.5  
339.5  
TBYTE + 249.5  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
search for preamble  
249  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
preamble qualification  
339.5  
249  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
sync word qualification  
TEOP + 354  
TEOP + 246  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
RX data (after a sync word)  
Rev. C | Page 40 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Fast  
Command/Bit/  
Automatic  
Transition  
Normal Transition  
Transition  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
Present  
State  
Next  
State  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
,
,
Mode  
Condition  
Packet  
TX_TO_RX_AUTO PHY_TX  
_TURNAROUND  
PHY_RX  
PHY_ON  
PHY_ON  
PHY_ON  
PHY_ON  
TPARAMP_DOWN + TBYTE  
322  
+
+
TPARAMP_DOWN  
+
From TX_EOF interrupt to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt  
TBYTE + 232  
Packet  
Packet  
Sport  
Sport  
TX_EOF  
PHY_TX  
PHY_RX  
PHY_TX  
PHY_RX  
TPARAMP_DOWN + TBYTE  
25  
TPARAMP_DOWN  
TBYTE + 5  
+
From TX_EOF interrupt to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt  
RX_EOF  
46  
10  
From INTERRUPT_CRC_CORRECT to  
CMD_FINISHED interrupt  
CMD_PHY_ON  
CMD_PHY_ON  
TPARAMP_DOWN + 51  
TPARAMP_DOWN  
22  
+
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
TBYTE + 54  
TBYTE + 28  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
search for preamble  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
50.5  
50.5  
23  
23  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
preamble qualification  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
sync word qualification  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
56  
26  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_ON issued during  
RX data (after a sync word)  
Sport  
Sport  
CMD_PHY_TX  
CMD_PHY_TX  
PHY_ON  
PHY_RX  
PHY_TX  
PHY_TX  
306  
237  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt; PA ramp up starts 3.4 µs after  
the interrupt  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
TBYTE + 325  
TBYTE + 250  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
search for preamble; PA ramp up starts  
3.4 µs after the interrupt  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
320  
245  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
preamble qualification. The PA ramp up  
starts 3.4 µs after the interrupt.  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
320  
245  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
sync word qualification; PA ramp up  
starts 3.4 µs after the interrupt  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
326  
249  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_TX issued during  
RX data (after a sync word). The PA ramp  
up starts 3.4 µs after the interrupt.  
Sport  
CMD_PHY_TX  
PHY_TX  
PHY_TX  
TPARAMP_DOWN + 315  
TPARAMP_DOWN  
243  
+
+
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt; PA ramp up starts 3.4 µs after  
the interrupt  
Sport  
Sport  
CMD_PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_RX  
PHY_ON  
PHY_TX  
PHY_RX  
PHY_RX  
327  
241  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt  
TPARAMP_DOWN + 345  
TPARAMP_DOWN  
250  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt  
Rev. C | Page 41 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Fast  
Command/Bit/  
Automatic  
Transition  
Normal Transition  
Transition  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
Present  
State  
Next  
State  
Time (μs)1, 2  
Typical  
,
,
Mode  
Condition  
Sport  
CMD_PHY_RX  
PHY_RX  
PHY_RX  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
search for preamble  
TBYTE + 342  
TBYTE + 249.5  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
339.5  
339.5  
346  
249  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
preamble qualification  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
249  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
sync word qualification  
CS  
From rising edge of to CMD_FINISHED  
252  
interrupt, CMD_PHY_RX issued during  
RX data (after a sync word)  
PA_LEVEL_MCR  
1 TPARAMP_DOWN = TPARAMP_UP  
=
, where PA_LEVEL_MCR sets the maximum PA output power (PA_LEVEL_MCR register, Address 0x307), PA_RAMP  
(9  
PA_RAMP)  
2
× DATA_RATE × 100  
sets the PA ramp rate (RADIO_CFG_8 register, Address 0x114), and DATA_RATE sets the transmit data rate (RADIO_CFG_0 register, Address 0x10C and RADIO_CFG_1  
register, Address 0x10D).  
2 TBIT = one bit period (µs), TBYTE = one byte period (µs), TEOP = time to end of packet (µs).  
Rev. C | Page 42 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
PACKET MODE  
The on-chip communications processor can be configured for  
use with a wide variety of packet-based radio protocols using  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK/OOK modulation. The general  
packet format, when using the packet management features of  
the communications processor, is illustrated in Table 14. To use  
the packet management features, the DATA_MODE setting in  
the PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL register (Address 0x126)  
should be set to packet mode; 240 bytes of dedicated packet  
RAM are available to store, transmit, and receive packets. In  
transmit mode, preamble, sync word, and CRC can be added by  
the communications processor to the data stored in the packet  
RAM for transmission. In addition, all packet data after the  
sync word can be optionally whitened, Manchester encoded, or  
8b/10b encoded on transmission and decoded on reception.  
PREAMBLE_LEN register (Address 0x11D). It is necessary to  
have preamble at the beginning of the packet to allow time for  
the receiver AGC, AFC, and clock and data recovery circuitry to  
settle before the start of the sync word. The required preamble  
length depends on the radio configuration. See the Radio  
Blocks section for more details.  
In receive mode, the ADF7023 can use a preamble qualification  
circuit to detect preamble and interrupt the host processor. The  
preamble qualification circuit tracks the received frame as a  
sliding window. The window is three bytes in length, and the  
preamble pattern is fixed at 0x55. The preamble bits are  
examined in 01pairs. If either bit or both bits are in error, the  
pair is deemed erroneous. The possible erroneous pairs are 00,  
11, and 10. The number of erroneous pairs tolerated in the  
preamble can be set using the PREAMBLE_MATCH register value  
(Address 0x11B) according to Table 13.  
In receive mode, the communications processor can be used to  
qualify received packets based on the preamble detection, sync  
word detection, CRC detection, or address match and generate  
an interrupt on the IRQ_GP3 pin. On reception of a valid  
packet, the received payload data is loaded to packet RAM  
memory. More information on interrupts is contained in the  
Interrupt Generation section.  
Table 13. Preamble Detection Tolerance (PREAMBLE_  
MATCH, Address 0x11B)  
Value  
0x0C  
0x0B  
0x0A  
0x09  
0x08  
0x00  
Description  
No errors allowed.  
One erroneous bit-pair allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Two erroneous bit-pairs allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Three erroneous bit-pairs allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Four erroneous bit-pairs allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Preamble detection disabled.  
PREAMBLE  
The preamble is a mandatory part of the packet that is auto-  
matically added by the communications processor when  
transmitting a packet and removed after receiving a packet.  
The preamble is a 0x55 sequence, with a programmable  
length between 1 byte and 256 bytes, that is set in the  
Table 14. ADF7023 Packet Structure Description1  
Packet Structure  
Payload  
Preamble  
Sync  
CRC  
Postamble  
Packet Format Options  
Length Address  
Payload Data  
Field Length  
1 byte to 256 bytes 1 bit to 24 bits 1 byte 1 byte to 9 bytes 0 bytes to 240 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes  
Optional Field in Packet  
Structure  
Comms Processor Adds in Tx,  
Removes in Rx  
Host Writes These Fields to  
Packet RAM  
Whitening/Dewhitening  
(Optional)  
Manchester Encoding/  
Decoding (Optional)  
8b/10b Encoding/Decoding  
(Optional)  
X
X
Yes  
X
Yes  
X
Yes  
X
Yes  
Yes  
X
X
Yes  
X
Yes  
X
Yes  
X
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
X
X
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Configurable Parameter  
Receive Interrupt on Valid  
Field Detection  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
X
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
X
Yes  
Yes  
X
X
Programmable Field Error  
Tolerance  
Programmable Field Offset  
(See Figure 78)  
Yes  
X
Yes  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Yes  
1 Yes indicates that the packet format option is supported; X indicates that the packet format option is not supported.  
Rev. C | Page 43 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
If PREAMBLE_MATCH is set to 0x0C, the ADF7023 must  
receive 12 consecutive 01 pairs (three bytes) to confirm that  
valid preamble has been detected. The user can select the option  
to automatically lock the AFC and/or AGC once the qualified  
preamble is detected. The AFC lock on preamble detection can  
be enabled by setting AFC_LOCK_MODE = 3 in the  
RADIO_CFG_10 register (Address 0x116:). The AGC lock on  
preamble detection can be enabled by setting AGC_LOCK_  
MODE = 3 in the RADIO_CFG_7 register (Address 0x113).  
The value of the sync word is set in the SYNC_BYTE_0,  
SYNC_BYTE_1, and SYNC_BYTE_2 registers (Address 0x121,  
Address 0x122, and Address 0x123, respectively). The sync  
word is transmitted most significant bit first starting with  
SYNC_BYTE_0. The sync word matching length at the receiver  
is set using SYNC_WORD_LENGTH in the SYNC_CONTROL  
register (Address 0x120) and can be one bit to 24 bits long; the  
transmitted sync word is a multiple of eight bits. Therefore, for  
nonbyte length sync words, the transmitted sync pattern should  
be appended with the preamble pattern as described in Figure 76  
and Table 16.  
After the preamble is detected and the end of preamble has  
been reached, the communications processor searches for the  
sync word. The search for the sync word lasts for a duration  
equal to the sum of the number of programmed sync word bits,  
plus the preamble matching tolerance (in bits) plus 16 bits. If  
the sync word routine is detected during this duration, the  
communications processor loads the received payload to packet  
RAM and computes the CRC (if enabled). If the sync word  
routine is not detected during this duration, the communications  
processor continues searching for the preamble.  
In receive mode, the ADF7023 can provide an interrupt on  
reception of the sync word sequence programmed in the  
SYNC_BYTE_0, SYNC_BYTE_1, and SYNC_BYTE_2 registers.  
This feature can be used to alert the host processor that a  
qualified sync word has been received. An error tolerance  
parameter can also be programmed that accepts a valid match  
when up to three bits of the sync word sequence are incorrect.  
The error tolerance value is set using the SYNC_ERROR_TOL  
setting in the SYNC_CONTROL register (Address 0x120), as  
described in Table 15.  
Preamble detection can be disabled by setting the PREAMBLE_  
MATCH register to 0x00. To enable an interrupt upon preamble  
detection, the user must set INTERRUPT_PREAMBLE_DETECT  
=1 in the INTERRUPT_MASK_0 register (Address 0x100).  
Table 15. Sync Word Detection Tolerance (SYNC_ERROR_  
TOL, Address 0x120)  
Value  
Description  
SYNC WORD  
00  
01  
10  
11  
No bit errors allowed.  
One bit error allowed.  
Two bit errors allowed.  
Three bit errors allowed.  
Sync word is the synchronization word used by the receiver for  
byte level synchronization, while also providing an optional  
interrupt on detection. It is automatically added to the packet  
by the communications processor in transmit mode and  
removed during reception of a packet.  
FIRST BIT SENT  
MSB  
LSB  
24 BITS ≥ SYNC_WORD_LENGTH > 16 BITS  
SYNC_BYTE_0  
SYNC_BYTE_1  
SYNC_BYTE_2  
APPEND UNUSED BITS  
WITH PREAMBLE (0101..)  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
16 BITS ≥ SYNC_WORD_LENGTH > 8 BITS  
SYNC_BYTE_1  
SYNC_BYTE_2  
APPEND UNUSED BITS  
WITH PREAMBLE (0101..)  
MSB  
SYNC_WORD_LENGTH ≤ 8 BITS  
SYNC_BYTE_2  
APPEND UNUSED BITS  
WITH PREAMBLE (0101..)  
Figure 76. Transmit Sync Word Configuration  
Rev. C | Page 44 of 112  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 16. Sync Word Programming Examples  
SYNC_WORD_  
LENGTH Bits in  
SYNC_CONTROL SYNC_ SYNC  
REGISTER  
(0x120)  
Receiver Sync  
Word Match  
Length (Bits)  
Required Sync Word (Binary,  
First Bit Being First in Time)  
BYTE_  
_BYTE SYNC_  
Transmitted Sync Word (Binary,  
BYTE_2 First Bit Being First in Time)  
01  
_11  
000100100011010001010110  
111010011100101000100  
0001001000110100  
011100001110  
00010010  
011100  
24  
21  
16  
12  
8
0x12  
0x5D  
0xXX  
0xXX  
0xXX  
0xXX  
0x34  
0x39  
0x12  
0x57  
0xXX  
0xXX  
0x56  
0x44  
0x34  
0x0E  
0x12  
0x5C  
0001_0010_0011_0100_0101_0110  
0101_1101_0011_1001_0100_0100  
0001_0010_0011_0100  
0101_0111_0000_1110  
0001_0010  
24  
21  
16  
12  
8
0101_1100  
6
6
1 X = don’t care.  
The communications processor calculates the actual received  
payload length as  
Choice of Sync Word  
The sync word should be chosen to have low correlation with  
the preamble and have good autocorrelation properties. When  
the AFC is set to lock on detection of sync word (AFC_LOCK_  
MODE = 3 and PREAMBLE_MATCH = 0), the sync word  
should be chosen to be dc free, and it should have a run length  
limit not greater than four bits.  
RxPayload Length = Length + LENGTH_OFFSET − 4  
where:  
Length is the length field (the first byte in the received payload).  
LENGTH_OFFSET is a programmable offset (set in the  
PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL register (Address 0x126).  
PAYLOAD  
The LENGTH_OFFSET value allows compatibility with  
systems where the length field in the proprietary packet may  
also include the length of the CRC and/or the sync word. The  
ADF7023 defines the payload length as the number of bytes  
from the end of the sync word to the start of the CRC. In  
variable packet length mode, the PACKET_LENGTH_MAX  
value defines the maximum packet length that can be received,  
as described in Figure 77.  
The host processor writes the transmit data payload to the  
packet RAM. The location of the transmit data in the packet  
RAM is defined by the TX_BASE_ADR value register (Address  
0x124). The TX_BASE_ADR value is the location of the first  
byte of the transmit payload data in the packet RAM. On  
reception of a valid sync word, the communications processor  
automatically loads the receive payload to the packet RAM. The  
RX_BASE_ADR register value (Address 0x125) sets the location  
in the packet RAM of the first byte of the received payload. For  
more details on packet RAM memory, see the ADF7023  
Memory Map section.  
TX PAYLOAD LENGTH = PACKET_LENGTH_MAX  
RX PAYLOAD LENGTH = PACKET_LENGTH_MAX  
SYNC  
WORD  
PAYLOAD  
PREAMBLE  
CRC  
FIXED  
TX PAYLOAD LENGTH = LENGTH  
RX PAYLOAD LENGTH = LENGTH + LENGTH_OFFSET – 4  
Byte Orientation  
The over-the-air arrangement of each transmitted packet RAM  
byte can be set to MSB first or LSB first using the DATA_BYTE  
setting in the PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL register  
(Address 0x126). The same orientation setting should be used  
on the transmit and receive sides of the RF link.  
SYNC  
VARIABLE PREAMBLE  
LENGTH  
PAYLOAD  
CRC  
WORD  
Figure 77. Payload Length in Fixed and Variable Length Packet Modes  
Addressing  
The ADF7023 provides a very flexible address matching scheme,  
allowing matching of a single address, multiple addresses, and  
broadcast addresses. Addresses up to 32 bits in length are supported.  
The address information can be included at any section of the  
transmit payload. The location of the starting byte of the address data  
in the received payload is set in the ADDRESS_MATCH_OFFSET  
register (Address 0x129), as illustrated in Figure 78. The number of  
bytes in the first address field is set in the ADDRESS_LENGTH  
register (Address 0x12A). These settings allow the communications  
processor to extract the address information from the received  
packet.  
Packet Length Modes  
The ADF7023 can be used in both fixed and variable length  
packet systems. Fixed or variable length packet mode is set  
using the PACKET_LEN variable setting in the PACKET_  
LENGTH_CONTROL register (Address 0x126).  
For a fixed packet length system, the length of the transmit and  
received payload is set by the PACKET_LENGTH_MAX register  
(Address 0x127). The payload length is defined as the number  
of bytes from the end of the sync word to the start of the CRC.  
In variable packet length mode, the communications processor  
extracts the length field from the received payload data. In  
transmit mode, the length field must be the first byte in the  
transmit payload.  
Rev. C | Page 45 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
The address data is then compared against a list of known addresses  
that are stored in BBRAM (Address 0x12B to Address 0x137).  
Each stored address byte has an associated mask byte, thereby  
allowing matching of partial sections of the address bytes, which is  
useful for checking broadcast addresses or a family of addresses  
that have a unique identifier in the address sequence. The format  
and placement of the address information in the payload data  
should match the address check settings at the receiver to ensure  
exact address detection and qualification. Table 17 shows the  
register locations in the BBRAM that are used for setup of the  
address checking. When Register 0x12A (number of bytes in  
the first address field) is set to 0x00, address checking is  
disabled. Note that if static register fixes are employed (see  
Table 91), the space available for address matching is reduced.  
ADDRESS_MATCH_OFFSET  
Table 18. Example Address Check Configuration  
BBRAM  
Address  
Value  
Description  
0x129  
0x09  
Location in payload of the first address  
byte  
0x12A  
0x02  
Number of bytes in the first address field,  
NADR_1 = 2  
0x12B  
0x12C  
0x12D  
0x12E  
0x12F  
0xAB  
0xFF  
0xCD  
0xFF  
0x02  
Address Match Byte 0  
Address Mask Byte 0  
Address Match Byte 1  
Address Mask Byte 1  
Number of bytes in the second address  
field, NADR_2 = 2  
0x130  
0x131  
0x132  
0x133  
0x134  
0x135  
0x136  
0x137  
0xAA  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0xXX  
0xXX  
0xXX  
Address Match Byte 0  
Address Mask Byte 0  
Address Match Byte 1  
Address Mask Byte 1  
End of addresses (indicated by 0x00)  
Don’t care  
SYNC  
WORD  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
PREAMBLE  
CRC  
PAYLOAD  
Figure 78. Address Match Offset  
Don’t care  
Don’t care  
Table 17. Address Check Register Setup  
Address (BBRAM)  
Description1  
CRC  
0x129, ADDRESS_MATCH_  
OFFSET  
Position of first address byte in the  
received packet (first byte after  
sync word = 0)  
An optional CRC-16 can be appended to the packet by setting  
CRC_EN =1 in the PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL register  
(Address 0x126). In receive mode, this bit enables CRC  
detection on the received packet. A default polynomial is used if  
PROG_CRC_EN = 0 in the SYMBOL_MODE register (Address  
0x11C). The default CRC polynomial is  
0x12A, ADDRESS_LENGTH  
Number of bytes in the first  
address field (NADR_1  
)
0x12B  
0x12C  
0x12D  
0x12E  
Address Match Byte 0  
Address Mask Byte 0  
Address Match Byte 1  
Address Mask Byte 1  
Address Match Byte NADR_1 − 1  
Address Mask Byte NADR_1 − 1  
0x00 to end or NADR_2 for another  
address check sequence  
g(x) = x16 + x12 + x5 +1  
Any other 16-bit polynomial can be used if PROG_CRC_EN = 1,  
and the polynomial is set in CRC_POLY_0 and CRC_POLY_1  
(Address 0x11E and Address 0x11F, respectively). The setup of  
the CRC is described in Table 19. The CRC is initialized with  
0x0000.  
1 NADR_1 = the number of bytes in the first address field; NADR_2 = the number of  
bytes in the second address field.  
Table 19.CRC Setup  
CRC_EN  
Bit in the  
PACKET_  
LENGTH  
PROG_  
The host processor should set the INTERRUPT_ADDRESS_  
MATCH bit in the INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0 register  
(Address 0x336) if an interrupt is required on the IRQ_GP3  
pin. Additional information on interrupts is contained in the  
Interrupt Generation section.  
CRC_EN  
Bit in the  
SYMBOL_  
CONTROL MODE  
Register  
Register  
X1  
Description  
CRC is disabled in transmit, and CRC  
detection is disabled in receive.  
0
Example Address Check  
1
1
0
1
CRC is enabled in transmit, and CRC  
detection is enabled in receive, with  
the default CRC polynomial.  
Consider a system with 16-bit address lengths, in which the first  
byte is located in the 10th byte of the received payload data. The  
system also uses broadcast addresses in which the first byte is  
always 0xAA. To match the exact address, 0xABCD or any  
broadcast address in the form 0xAAXX, the ADF7023 must be  
configured as shown in Table 18.  
CRC is enabled in transmit, and CRC  
detection is enabled in receive, with  
the CRC polynomial defined by  
CRC_POLY_0 and CRC_POLY_1.  
1 X = don’t care.  
Rev. C | Page 46 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
To convert a user-defined polynomial to the 2-byte value, the  
polynomial should be written in binary format. The x16  
coefficient is assumed equal to 1 and is, therefore, discarded.  
The remaining 16 bits then make up CRC_POLY_0 (most  
significant byte) and CRC_POLY_1 (least significant byte).  
Two examples of setting common 16-bit CRCs are shown in  
Table 20.  
POSTAMBLE  
The communications processor automatically appends two  
bytes of postamble to the end of the transmitted packet. Each  
byte of the postamble is 0x55. The first byte is transmitted  
immediately after the CRC. The PA ramp-down begins  
immediately after the first postamble byte. The second byte is  
transmitted while the PA is ramping down.  
Table 20. Example: Programming of CRC_POLY_0 and  
CRC_POLY_1  
On the receiver, if the received packet is valid, the RSSI is  
automatically measured during the first postamble byte, and the  
result is stored in the RSSI_READBACK register (Address  
0x312). The RSSI is measured by the communications processor  
17 μs after the last CRC bit.  
Binary  
Format  
Polynomial  
CRC_POLY_0 CRC_POLY_1  
x16 + x15 + x2 + 1  
(CRC-16-IBM)  
1_1000_0000_ 0x80  
0000_0101  
0x05  
TRANSMIT PACKET TIMING  
x16 + x13 + x12  
+
1_0011_1101_ 0x3D  
0x65  
x11 x10 + x8 + x6 + 0110_0101  
x5 + x2 + 1  
The PA ramp timing in relation to the transmit packet data is  
described in Figure 79. After the CMD_PHY_TX command is  
issued, a VCO calibration is carried out, followed by a delay for  
synthesizer settling. The PA ramp follows the synthesizer  
settling. After the PA is ramped up to the programmed rate,  
there is 1-byte delay before the start of modulation (preamble).  
At the beginning of the second byte of postamble, the PA ramps  
down. The communications processor then transitions to the  
PHY_ON state or the PHY_RX state (if the TX_AUTO_TURN_  
AROUND bit is enabled or the CMD_PHY_RX command is  
issued).  
(CRC-16-DNP)  
To enable CRC detection on the receiver, with the default CRC  
or user-defined 16-bit CRC, CRC_EN in the PACKET_  
LENGTH_CONTROL register (Address 0x126) should be set to  
1. An interrupt can be generated on reception of a CRC verified  
packet (see the Interrupt Generation section).  
RAMP TIME  
1 BYTE  
RAMP TIME  
STATE TRANSITION TIME TO  
PHY_TX (See Table 12)  
CMD_PHY_TX  
PA OUTPUT  
TX DATA  
SYNC  
WORD  
PREAMBLE  
PAYLOAD  
CRC POSTAMBLE  
142µs  
55µs  
COMMUNICATIONS  
PROCESSOR  
PA  
RAMP  
PA  
RAMP  
VCO CAL  
SYNTH  
PHY_TX  
= 0x00 (BUSY)  
= 0x14 (PHY_TX)  
FW_STATE  
Figure 79. Transmit Packet Timing  
Rev. C | Page 47 of 112  
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
DATA WHITENING  
8B/10B ENCODING  
Data whitening can be employed to avoid long runs of 1s or 0s  
in the transmitted data stream. This ensures sufficient bit  
transitions in the packet, which aids in receiver clock and data  
recovery because the encoding breaks up long runs of 1s or 0s  
in the transmit packet. The data, excluding the preamble and  
sync word, is automatically whitened before transmission by  
XOR’ing the data with an 8-bit pseudorandom sequence. At the  
receiver, the data is XORed with the same pseudorandom  
sequence, thereby reversing the whitening. The linear feedback  
shift register polynomial used is x7 + x1 + 1. Data whitening and  
dewhitening are enabled by setting DATA_WHITENING = 1 in  
the SYMBOL_MODE register (Address 0x11C).  
8b/10b encoding is a byte-orientated encoding scheme that  
maps an 8-bit byte to a 10-bit data block. It ensures that the  
maximum number of consecutive 1s or 0s (that is, run length)  
in any 10-bit transmitted symbol is five. The advantage of this  
encoding scheme is that dc balancing is employed without the  
efficiency loss of Manchester encoding. The rate loss for 8b/10b  
encoding is 0.8, whereas for Manchester encoding, it is 0.5.  
Encoding and decoding are applied to the payload data and the  
CRC. The 8b/10b encoding and decoding are enabled by setting  
EIGHT_TEN_ENC =1 in the SYMBOL_MODE register  
(Address 0x11C).  
MANCHESTER ENCODING  
Manchester encoding can be used to ensure a dc-free (zero  
mean) transmission. The encoded over-the-air bit rate (chip  
rate) is double the rate set by the DATA_RATE variable  
(Address 0x10C and Address 0x10D). A Binary 0 is mapped to  
10, and a Binary 1 is mapped to 01. Manchester encoding and  
decoding are applied to the payload data and the CRC. It is  
recommended to use Manchester encoding for OOK modu-  
lation. Manchester encoding and decoding are enabled by  
setting MANCHESTER_ENC = 1 in the SYMBOL_MODE  
register (Address 0x11C).  
Rev. C | Page 48 of 112  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
SPORT MODE  
It is possible to bypass all of the packet management features of  
the ADF7023 and use the sport interface for transmit and  
receive data. The sport interface is a high speed synchronous  
serial interface allowing direct interfacing to processors and  
DSPs. Sport mode is enabled using the DATA_MODE setting in  
the PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL register (Address 0x126),  
as described in Table 21. The sport mode interface is on the GPIO  
pins (GP0, GP1, GP2, GP4, and XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1). These  
GPIO pins can be configured using the GPIO_CONFIGURE  
setting (Address 0x3FA), as described in Table 22.  
interface (Pin GP1). The transmit clock appears on the GP2 pin.  
The transmit data from the host processor should be synch-  
ronized with this clock. The FW_STATE variable in the status  
word or the CMD_FINISHED interrupt can be used to indicate  
when the ADF7023 has reached the PHY_TX state and, there-  
fore, is ready to begin transmitting data. The ADF7023 keeps  
transmitting the serial data presented at the GP1 input until the  
host processor issues a command to exit the PHY_TX state.  
SPORT MODE IN RECEIVE  
The sport interface supports the receive operation with a  
number of modes to suit particular signaling requirements.  
The receive data appears on the GP0 pin, whereas the receive  
synchronized clock appears on the GP2 pin. The GP4 pin  
provides an interrupt or strobe signal on either preamble or  
sync word detection, as described in Table 21 and Table 22.  
Once enabled, the interrupt signal and strobe signals remain  
operational while in the PHY_RX state. The strobe signal gives  
a single high pulse of 1-bit duration every eight bits. The strobe  
signal is most useful when used with sync word detection  
because it is synchronized to the sync word and strobes the first  
bit in every byte.  
Sport mode provides a receive interrupt source on GP4. This  
interrupt source can be configured to provide an interrupt, or  
strobe signal, on either preamble detection or sync word  
detection. The type of interrupt is configured using the  
GPIO_CONFIGURE setting.  
PACKET STRUCTURE IN SPORT MODE  
In sport mode, the host processor has full control over the  
packet structure. However, the preamble frame is still required  
to allow sufficient bits for receiver settling (AGC, AFC, and  
CDR). In sport mode, sync word detection is not mandatory in  
the ADF7023 but can be enabled to provide byte level  
synchronization for the host processor via the sync word detect  
interrupt or strobe on GP4. The general format of a sport mode  
packet is shown in Figure 80.  
TRANSMIT BIT LATENCIES IN SPORT MODE  
The transmit bit latency is the time from the sampling of a bit  
by the transmit data clock on GP2 to when that bit appears at  
the RF output. There is no transmit bit latency when using  
2FSK/MSK modulation. The latency when using GFSK/GMSK  
modulation is two bits. It is important that the host processor  
keep the ADF7023 in the PHY_TX state for two bit periods  
after the last data bit is sampled by the data clock to account for  
this latency when using GMSK/GFSK modulation.  
SYNC  
WORD  
PREAMBLE  
PAYLOAD  
Figure 80. General Sport Mode Packet  
SPORT MODE IN TRANSMIT  
Figure 81 illustrates the operation of the sport interface in  
transmit. Once in the PHY_TX state with sport mode enabled,  
the data input of the transmitter is fully controlled by the sport  
Table 21. SPORT Mode Setup  
DATA_MODE Bits in  
PACKET_LENGTH_  
CONTROL Register  
Description  
GPIO Configuration  
DATA_MODE = 0  
Packet mode enabled. Packet management is  
controlled by the communications processor.  
DATA_MODE = 1  
DATA_MODE = 2  
Sport mode enabled. The Rx data and Rx clock are  
enabled in the PHY_RX state (GPIO_CONFIGURE =  
0xA0, 0xA3, 0xA6). The Rx clock is enabled in the  
PHY_RX state, and Rx data is enabled on the  
preamble detect (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1, 0xA2,  
0xA4, 0xA5, 0xA7, 0xA8).  
GP0: Rx data  
GP1: Tx data  
GP2: Tx/Rx clock  
GP4: interrupt or strobe enabled on preamble detect  
(depends on GPIO_CONFIGURE)  
XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1: depends on GPIO_CONFIGURE  
Sport mode enabled. The Rx data and Rx clock are  
GP0: Rx data  
GP1: Tx data  
GP2: Tx/Rx clock  
GP4: interrupt or strobe enabled on sync word detect  
(depends on GPIO_CONFIGURE)  
XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1: depends on GPIO_CONFIGURE  
enabled in the PHY_RX state if GPIO_CONFIGURE =  
0xA0, 0xA3, 0xA6. The Rx clock is enabled in the  
PHY_RX state, and Rx data is enabled on the  
preamble detect if GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1, 0xA2,  
0xA4, 0xA5, 0xA7, 0xA8.  
Rev. C | Page 49 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 22. GPIO Functionality in Sport Mode  
GPIO_CONFIGURE  
GP0  
GP1  
GP2  
GP4  
XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1  
0xA0  
0xA1  
0xA2  
0xA3  
0xA4  
0xA5  
0xA6  
0xA7  
0xA8  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Rx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx data  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Tx/Rx clock  
Not used  
Interrupt  
Strobe  
Not used  
Interrupt  
Strobe  
Not used  
Interrupt  
Strobe  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
32.768 kHz XTAL input  
32.768 kHz XTAL input  
32.768 kHz XTAL input  
EXT_UC_CLK output  
EXT_UC_CLK output  
EXT_UC_CLK output  
PHY_TX  
CMD_PHY_ON  
CMD_PHY_TX  
PACKET  
PA  
RAMP  
PA  
RAMP  
SYNC  
WORD  
PREAMBLE  
PAYLOAD  
GP2 (TX CLK)  
GP1 (TX DATA)  
IRQ_GP3  
(CMD_FINISHED INTERRUPT)  
GP2 (TX CLK)  
GP0 (TX DATA)  
Figure 81. Sport Mode Transmit  
PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_ON  
SYNC  
WORD  
PACKET  
PREAMBLE  
PAYLOAD  
GP2 (RX CLK)  
GP0 (RX DATA)  
GP4  
GP2 (RX CLK)  
GP0 (RX DATA)  
Figure 82. Sport Mode Receive, DATA_MODE = 1, 2 and GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA0, 0xA3, 0xA6  
Rev. C | Page 50 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_ON  
SYNC  
WORD  
PACKET  
PREAMBLE  
PAYLOAD  
GP2 (RX CLK)  
GP0 (RX DATA)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA2)  
8/(DATA RATE)  
PREAMBLE  
DETECTED  
GP2 (RX CLK)  
GP0 (RX DATA)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA2)  
Figure 83. Sport Mode Receive, DATA_MODE = 1, GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1, 0xA2, 0xA4, 0xA5, 0xA7, 0xA8  
PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_ON  
SYNC  
WORD  
PACKET  
PREAMBLE  
PAYLOAD  
GP2 (RX CLK)  
GP0 (RX DATA)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA2)  
GP2 (RX CLK)  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
SWD  
BIT N  
PAYLOAD PAYLOAD  
GP0 (RX DATA)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1)  
GP4 (GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA2)  
BIT N-9 BIT N-8 BIT N-7 BIT N-6  
BIT N-5 BIT N-4 BIT N-3 BIT N-2 BIT N-1  
BIT 1  
BIT 2  
Figure 84. Sport Mode Receive, DATA_MODE = 2, GPIO_CONFIGURE = 0xA1, 0xA2, 0xA4, 0xA5, 0xA7, 0xA8  
Rev. C | Page 51 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
INTERRUPT GENERATION  
The ADF7023 uses a highly flexible, powerful interrupt system  
with support for MAC level interrupts and PHY level interrupts.  
To enable an interrupt source, the corresponding mask bit must  
be set. When an enabled interrupt occurs, the IRQ_GP3 pin  
goes high, and the interrupt bit of the status word is set to Logic 1.  
The host processor can use either the IRQ_GP3 pin or the status  
word to check for an interrupt. After an interrupt is asserted, the  
ADF7023 continues operations unaffected, unless it is directed  
to do otherwise by the host processor. An outline of the interrupt  
source and mask system is shown in Table 23.  
interrupt condition is high. The structure of these two registers  
is shown in Table 24.  
Following an interrupt condition, the host processor should  
clear the relevant interrupt flag so that further interrupts assert  
the IRQ_GP3 pin. This is performed by writing a Logic 1 to the  
bit that is high in either the INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0 or  
INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1 register. If multiple bits in the  
interrupt source registers are high, they can be cleared individually  
or altogether by writing Logic 1 to them. The IRQ_GP3 pin goes  
low when all the interrupt source bits are cleared.  
MAC interrupts can be enabled by writing a Logic 1 to the relevant  
bits of the INTERRUPT_MASK_0 register (Address 0x100) and  
PHY level interrupts by writing a Logic 1 to the relevant bits of  
the INTERRUPT_MASK_1 register (Address 0x101). The  
structure of these memory locations is described in Table 23.  
As an example, take the case where a battery alarm (in the  
INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1 register) interrupt occurs. The host  
processor should  
1. Read the interrupt source registers. In this example, if none  
of the interrupt flags in INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0 is  
enabled, only INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1 must be read.  
2. Clear the interrupt by writing 0x80 (or 0xFF) to  
INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1.  
In the case of an interrupt condition, the interrupt source can be  
determined by reading the INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0 register  
(Address 0x336) and the INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1 register  
(Address 0x337). The bit that corresponds to the relevant  
3. Respond to the interrupt condition.  
Table 23. Structure of the Interrupt Mask Registers  
Register  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
INTERRUPT_MASK_0,  
Address 0x100  
7
INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS  
Interrupt when the number of WUC wake-ups  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:0]) has reached the threshold  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD[15:0])  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
6
5
INTERRUPT_SWM_RSSI_DET  
INTERRUPT_AES_DONE  
Interrupt when the measured RSSI during smart wake mode has  
exceeded the RSSI threshold value (SWM_RSSI_THRESH, Address 0x108)  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Interrupt when an AES encryption or decryption command is  
complete; available only when the AES firmware module has been  
loaded to the ADF7023 program RAM  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
4
3
2
1
INTERRUPT_TX_EOF  
Interrupt when a packet has finished transmitting  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
INTERRUPT_ADDRESS_MATCH  
INTERRUPT_CRC_CORRECT  
INTERRUPT_SYNC_DETECT  
Interrupt when a received packet has a valid address match  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Interrupt when a received packet has the correct CRC  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Interrupt when a qualified sync word has been detected in the  
received packet  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
0
INTERRUPT_PREAMBLE_DETECT  
Interrupt when a qualified preamble has been detected in the  
received packet  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Rev. C | Page 52 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Register  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
INTERRUPT_MASK_1,  
Address 0x101  
7
BATTERY_ALARM  
Interrupt when the battery voltage has dropped below the threshold  
value (BATTERY_MONITOR_THRESHOLD_VOLTAGE, Address 0x32D)  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
6
CMD_READY  
Interrupt when the communications processor is ready to load a new  
command; mirrors the CMD_READY bit of the status word  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
5
4
Reserved  
WUC_TIMEOUT  
Interrupt when the WUC has timed out  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
3
2
1
Reserved  
Reserved  
SPI_READY  
Interrupt when the SPI is ready for access  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
0
CMD_FINISHED  
Interrupt when the communications processor has finished  
performing a command  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Table 24. Structure of the Interrupt Source Registers  
Register  
Bit  
Name  
Interrupt Description  
INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0,  
Address: 0x336  
7
INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS  
Asserted when the number of WUC wake-ups  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:0]) has reached the threshold  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD[15:0]).  
6
5
INTERRUPT_SWM_RSSI_DET  
INTERRUPT_AES_DONE  
Asserted when the measured RSSI during smart wake mode has  
exceeded the RSSI threshold value (SWM_RSSI_THRESH, Address 0x108).  
Asserted when an AES encryption or decryption command is  
complete; available only when the AES firmware module has been  
loaded to the ADF7023 program RAM.  
4
3
INTERRUPT_TX_EOF  
INTERRUPT_ADDRESS_MATCH  
Asserted when a packet has finished transmitting (packet mode only).  
Asserted when a received packet has a valid address match (packet  
mode only).  
2
1
INTERRUPT_CRC_CORRECT  
INTERRUPT_SYNC_DETECT  
Asserted when a received packet has the correct CRC (packet mode only).  
Asserted when a qualified sync word has been detected in the  
received packet.  
0
7
6
INTERRUPT_PREAMBLE_DETECT  
BATTERY_ALARM  
Asserted when a qualified preamble has been detected in the  
received packet.  
INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1,  
Address: 0x337  
Asserted when the battery voltage has dropped below the threshold  
value (BATTERY_MONITOR_THRESHOLD_VOLTAGE, Address 0x32D).  
CMD_READY  
Asserted when the communications processor is ready to load a new  
command; mirrors the CMD_READY bit of the status word.  
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
WUC_TIMEOUT  
Reserved  
Asserted when the WUC has timed out.  
Reserved  
SPI_READY  
CMD_FINISHED  
Asserted when the SPI is ready for access.  
Asserted when the communications processor has finished  
performing a command. If the CMD_FINISHED interrupt is enabled,  
following the issue of CMD_PHY_TX, the first bit of user data is  
transmitted 1.5 × TBIT + 2.3 µs following the interrupt. The PA ramp  
starts 3.4 µs after the interrupt. (TBIT is the time taken to transmit one bit.)  
provided on GP4, which gives a dedicated sport mode interrupt  
on either preamble or sync word detection. For more details, see  
the Sport Mode section.  
INTERRUPTS IN SPORT MODE  
In sport mode, the interrupts from INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1  
are all available. However, only INTERRUPT_PREAMBLE_  
DETECT and INTERRUPT_SYNC_DETECT are available  
from INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0. A second interrupt pin is  
Rev. C | Page 53 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023 MEMORY MAP  
11-BIT  
ADDRESSES  
0x3FF  
PROGRAM  
RAM  
MCR  
256 BYTES  
ADDRESS  
[12:0]  
2kB  
0x300  
CS  
MISO  
MOSI  
SCLK  
NOT USED  
0x13F  
PROGRAM  
ROM  
SPI  
4kB  
BBRAM  
64 BYTES  
0x100  
SPI/CP  
MEMORY  
ARBITRATION  
0x0FF  
COMMS  
INSTRUCTION/DATA  
[7:0]  
PACKET  
RAM  
PROCESSOR  
COMMS  
PROCESSOR  
CLOCK  
256 BYTES  
8-BIT  
RISC  
ENGINE  
ADDRESS/  
DATA  
MUX  
ADDRESS[10:0]  
DATA[7:0]  
0x000  
0x00F  
RESERVED  
0x000  
Figure 85. ADF7023 Memory Map  
This section describes the various memory locations used by  
the ADF7023. The radio control, packet management, and  
smart wake mode capabilities of the part are realized through  
the use of an integrated RISC processor, which executes  
instructions stored in the embedded program ROM. There is  
also a local RAM, subdivided into three sections, that is used as  
a data packet buffer, both for transmitted and received data  
(packet RAM), and for storing the radio and packet  
The BBRAM is used to maintain settings needed at wake-up  
from sleep mode by the wake-up controller. Upon wake-up  
from sleep, in smart wake mode, the BBRAM contents are read  
by the on-chip processor to recover the packet management and  
radio parameters.  
MODEM CONFIGURATION RAM (MCR)  
The 256-byte modem configuration RAM (MCR) contains the  
various registers used for direct control or observation of the  
physical layer radio blocks of the ADF7023. The contents of the  
MCR are not retained in the PHY_SLEEP state.  
management configuration (BBRAM and MCR). The RAM  
addresses of these memory banks are 11 bits long.  
BBRAM  
PROGRAM ROM  
The battery backup RAM (BBRAM) contains the main radio  
and packet management registers used to configure the radio.  
On application of battery power to the ADF7023 for the first  
time, the entire BBRAM should be initialized by the host  
processor with the appropriate settings. After the BBRAM has  
been written to, the CMD_CONFIG_DEV command should be  
issued to update the radio and communications processor with  
the current BBRAM settings. The CMD_CONFIG_DEV  
command can be issued in the PHY_OFF state or the PHY_ON  
state only.  
The program ROM consists of 4 kB of nonvolatile memory. It  
contains the firmware code for radio control, packet manage-  
ment, and smart wake mode.  
PROGRAM RAM  
The program RAM consists of 2 kB of volatile memory. This  
memory space is used for software modules, such as AES en-  
cryption, IR calibration, and Reed Solomon coding, which are  
available from Analog Devices. The software modules are down-  
loaded to the program RAM memory space over the SPI by the  
host processor. See the Downloadable Firmware Modules section  
for details on loading a firmware module to program RAM.  
Rev. C | Page 54 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
TX_BASE_ADR register (Address 0x124), the transmit address  
pointer, determines the start address of data to be transmitted  
by the communications processor. This memory can be  
arbitrarily assigned to store single or multiple transmit or  
receive packets, with and without overlap. The RX_BASE_ADR  
value should be chosen to ensure that there is enough allocated  
packet RAM space for the maximum receiver payload length.  
PACKET RAM  
The packet RAM consists of 256 bytes of memory space. The  
first 16 bytes of this memory space are allocated for use by the  
on-chip processor. The remaining 240 bytes of this memory  
space are allocated for storage of data from valid received  
packets and packet data to be transmitted. The communications  
processor stores received payload data at the memory location  
indicated by the value of the RX_BASE_ADR register (Address  
0x125), the receive address pointer. The value of the  
TRANSMIT  
AND RECEIVE  
PACKET  
240 BYTE TRANSMIT  
MULTIPLE TRANSMIT  
AND RECEIVE  
PACKETS  
OR RECEIVE  
PACKET  
TX_BASE_ADR  
RX_BASE_ADR  
TX_BASE_ADR  
(PACKET 1)  
TX_BASE_ADR  
0x010  
0x010  
0x010  
TRANSMIT  
PAYLOAD  
TRANSMIT  
PAYLOAD  
TX_BASE_ADR  
(PACKET 2)  
TRANSMIT  
PAYLOAD 2  
RX_BASE_ADR  
(PACKET 1)  
TRANSMIT OR  
RECEIVE  
RECEIVE  
PAYLOAD  
RX_BASE_ADR  
PAYLOAD  
RECEIVE  
PAYLOAD  
RX_BASE_ADR  
(PACKET 2)  
RECEIVE  
PAYLOAD 2  
0x0FF  
0x0FF  
0x0FF  
Figure 86. Example Packet RAM Configurations Using the Tx Packet and Rx Packet Address Pointers  
Rev. C | Page 55 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
SPI INTERFACE  
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS  
STATUS WORD  
The ADF7023 is equipped with a 4-wire SPI interface, using the  
The status word of the ADF7023 is automatically returned over the  
MISO each time a byte is transferred over the MOSI. Shifting in  
double SPI_NOP commands (see Table 27) causes the status word  
to be shifted out as shown in Figure 89. The meaning of the various  
bit fields is illustrated in Table 25. The FW_STATE variable can  
be used to read the current state of the communications processor  
and is described in Table 26. If it is busy performing an action  
or state transition, FW_STATE is busy. The FW_STATE variable  
also indicates the current state of the radio.  
CS  
SCLK, MISO, MOSI, and pins. The ADF7023 always acts as a  
slave to the host processor. Figure 87 shows an example connection  
diagram between the processor and the ADF7023. The diagram  
also shows the direction of the signal flow for each pin. The SPI  
interface is active, and the MISO outputs enabled, only while  
CS  
the  
input is low. The interface uses a word length of eight  
bits, which is compatible with the SPI hardware of most processors.  
The data transfer through the SPI interface occurs with the most  
significant bit first. The MOSI input is sampled at the rising  
edge of SCLK. As commands or data are shifted in from the  
MOSI input at the SCLK rising edge, the status word or data is  
shifted out at the MISO pin synchronous with the SCLK clock  
The SPI_READY variable is used to indicate when the SPI is ready  
for access. The CMD_READY variable is used to indicate when  
the communications processor is ready to accept a new command.  
The status word should be polled and the CMD_READY bit  
examined before issuing a command to ensure that the  
communications processor is ready to accept a new command.  
It is not necessary to check the CMD_READY bit before issuing  
a SPI memory access command. It is possible to queue one  
command while the communications processor is busy. This  
is discussed in the Command Queuing section.  
CS  
falling edge. If  
is brought low, the most significant bit of the  
status word appears on the MISO output without the need for a  
rising clock edge on the SCLK input.  
GPIO  
SCLK  
MOSI  
MISO  
IRQ  
CS  
SCLK  
MOSI  
MISO  
HOST  
PROCESSOR  
ADF7023  
IRQ_GP3  
The ADF7023 interrupt handler can be also be configured to  
generate an interrupt signal on IRQ_GP3 when the communi-  
cations processor is ready to accept a new command (CMD_  
READY in the INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1 register (Address  
0x337)) or when it has finished processing a command  
(CMD_FINISHED in the INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1 register  
(Address 0x337)).  
Figure 87. SPI Interface Connections  
COMMAND ACCESS  
The ADF7023 is controlled through commands. Command  
words are single octet instructions that control the state  
transitions of the communications processor and access to the  
registers and packet RAM. The complete list of valid commands  
is given in the Command Reference section. Commands that  
have a CMD prefix are handled by the communications processor.  
Memory access commands have an SPI prefix and are handled  
by an independent controller. Thus, SPI commands can be issued  
independent of the state of the communications processor.  
CS  
MOSI  
MISO  
SPI_NOP  
IGNORE  
SPI_NOP  
STATUS  
Figure 89. Reading the Status Word Using a Double SPI_NOP Command  
CS  
A command is initiated by bringing  
low and shifting in the  
Table 25. Status Word  
command word over the SPI, as shown in Figure 88. All commands  
are executed on the last positive SCLK edge of the command.  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
[7]  
SPI_READY  
0: SPI is not ready for access.  
1: SPI is ready for access.  
0: no pending interrupt condition.  
1: pending interrupt condition (mirrors  
the IRQ_GP3 pin).  
CS  
The  
input must be brought high again after a command has  
been shifted into the ADF7023 to enable the recognition of  
successive command words. This is because a single command  
[6]  
[5]  
IRQ_STATUS  
CS  
can be issued only during a  
low period (with the exception  
CMD_READY 0: the radio controller is not ready to  
receive a radio controller command.  
1: the radio controller is ready to receive a  
radio controller command.  
of a double NOP command).  
CS  
[4:0] FW_STATE  
Indicates the ADF7023 state (in Table 26).  
MOSI  
MISO  
CMD  
IGNORE  
Figure 88. Command Write (No Parameters)  
Rev. C | Page 56 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 26. FW_STATE Description  
the state of the communications processor. The operation of the  
status word and these bits is illustrated in Figure 90 when a  
CMD_PHY_ON command is issued in the PHY_OFF state.  
Value  
0x0F  
0x00  
0x11  
0x12  
0x13  
0x14  
0x06  
0x05  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
0x0A  
State  
Initializing  
Busy, performing a state transition  
PHY_OFF  
PHY_ON  
PHY_RX  
Operation of the status word when a command is being queued  
is illustrated in Figure 91 when a CMD_PHY_ON command is  
issued in the PHY_OFF state followed quickly by a CMD_  
PHY_RX command. The CMD_PHY_RX command is issued  
while FW_STATE is busy (that is, transitioning between the  
PHY_OFF and PHY_ON states) but the CMD_READY bit is  
high, indicating that the command queue is empty. After the  
CMD_PHY_RX command is issued, the CMD_READY bit  
transitions to a logic low, indicating that the command queue is  
full. After the PHY_OFF to PHY_ON transition is finished, the  
PHY_RX command is processed immediately by the  
PHY_TX  
PHY_SLEEP  
Performing CMD_GET_RSSI  
Performing CMD_IR_CAL  
Performing CMD_AES_DECRYPT_INIT  
Performing CMD_AES_DECRYPT  
Performing CMD_AES_ENCRYPT  
communications processor, and the CMD_READY bit goes  
high, indicating that the command queue is empty and another  
command can be issued.  
COMMAND QUEUING  
The CMD_READY status bit is used to indicate that the command  
queue used by the communications processor is empty. The queue  
is one command deep. The FW_STATE bit is used to indicate  
ISSUE  
CMD_PHY_ON  
CS  
CMD_READY  
FW_STATE  
= 0x11 (PHY_OFF)  
0xB1  
= 0x00 (BUSY)  
0xA0  
= 0x12 (PHY_ON)  
0xB2  
0x80  
STATUS WORD  
TRANSITION RADIO FROM  
PHY_OFF TO PHY_ON  
COMMUNICATIONS  
PROCESSOR ACTION  
WAITING FOR COMMAND  
WAITING FOR COMMAND  
Figure 90. Operation of the CMD_READY and FW_STATE Bits in Transitioning the ADF7023 from the PHY_OFF State to the PHY_ON State  
ISSUE  
ISSUE  
CMD_PHY_ON CMD_PHY_RX  
CS  
CMD_READY  
FW_STATE  
0x12  
0xB2  
= 0x11 (PHY_OFF)  
= 0x00 (BUSY)  
= 0x00 (BUSY)  
0xA0  
= 0x13 (PHY_RX)  
0xB3  
STATUS WORD  
0xB1  
0x80  
0xA0  
0x80  
COMMUNICATIONS  
PROCESSOR ACTION  
TRANSITION RADIO FROM  
PHY_OFF TO PHY_ON  
TRANSITION RADIO FROM  
PHY_ON TO PHY_RX  
WAITING FOR COMMAND  
WAITING FOR COMMAND  
IN PHY_ON, READING  
NEW COMMAND  
Figure 91. Command Queuing and Operation of the CMD_READY and FW_STATE Bits in Transitioning the ADF7023  
from the PHY_OFF State to the PHY_ON State and Then to the PHY_RX State  
Rev. C | Page 57 of 112  
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Block Write  
MEMORY ACCESS  
MCR, BBRAM, and packet RAM memory locations can be  
written to in block format using the SPI_MEM_WR command.  
The SPI_MEM_WR command code is 00011xxxb, where xxxb  
represent Bits[10:8] of the first 11-bit address. If more than one  
data byte is written, the write address is automatically incremented  
Memory locations are accessed by invoking the relevant SPI  
command. An 11-bit address is used to identify registers or  
locations in the memory space. The most significant three bits  
of the address are incorporated into the SPI command by  
appending them as the LSBs of the command word. Figure 92  
illustrates command, address, and data partitioning. The various  
SPI memory access commands are different, depending on the  
memory location being accessed (see Table 27).  
CS  
for every byte sent until  
is set high, which terminates the  
memory access command (see Figure 93 for more details). The  
maximum block write for the MCR, packet RAM, and BBRAM  
memories is 256 bytes, 256 bytes, and 64 bytes, respectively.  
These maximum block-write lengths should not be exceeded.  
An SPI command should be issued only if the SPI_READY bit  
in the INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1 register (Address 0x337) of  
the status word bit is high. The ADF7023 interrupt handler can  
be also be configured to generate an interrupt signal on IRQ_GP3  
when the SPI_READY bit is high.  
Example  
Write 0x00 to the ADC_CONFIG_HIGH register  
(Address 0x35A).  
An SPI command should not be issued while the communications  
processor is initializing (FW_STATE = 0x0F). SPI commands  
can be issued in any other communications processor state,  
including the busy state (FW_STATE = 0x00). This allows the  
ADF7023 memory to be accessed while the radio is transi-  
tioning between states.  
The first five bits of the SPI_MEM_WR command are 00011.  
The 11-bit address of ADC_CONFIG_HIGH is  
01101011010.  
The first byte sent is 00011011 or 0x1B.  
The second byte sent is 01011010 or 0x5A.  
The third byte sent is 0x00.  
Thus, 0x1B, 0x5A, 0x00 is written to the part.  
CS  
SPI MEMORY ACCESS COMMAND  
MEMORY ADDRESS  
BITS[7:0]  
DATA BYTE  
MOSI  
5 BITS  
MEMORY ADDRESS  
BITS[10:0]  
DATA  
n × 8 BITS  
Figure 92. SPI Memory Access Command/Address Format  
Table 27. Summary of SPI Memory Access Commands  
SPI Command Command Value  
Description  
SPI_MEM_WR  
0x18 (packet RAM)  
0x19 (BBRAM)  
0x1B (MCR)  
Write data to BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM sequentially. An 11-bit address is used to identify  
memory locations. The most significant three bits of the address are incorporated into the  
command (xxxb). This command is followed by the remaining eight bits of the address.  
0x1E (program RAM)  
SPI_MEM_RD  
0x38 (packet RAM)  
0x39 (BBRAM)  
0x3B (MCR)  
Read data from BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM sequentially. An 11-bit address is used to identify  
memory locations. The most significant three bits of the address are incorporated into the command  
(xxxb). This command is followed by the remaining eight bits of the address, which is subsequently  
followed by the appropriate number of SPI_NOP commands.  
SPI_MEMR_WR 0x08 (packet RAM)  
0x09 (BBRAM)  
Write data to BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM nonsequentially.  
0x0B (MCR)  
SPI_MEMR_RD 0x28 (packet RAM)  
0x29 (BBRAM)  
Read data from BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM nonsequentially.  
0x2B (MCR)  
SPI_NOP  
0xFF  
No operation. Use for dummy writes when polling the status word. Also used as dummy data on  
the MOSI line when performing a memory read.  
Rev. C | Page 58 of 112  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Random Address Write  
Random Address Read  
MCR, BBRAM, and packet RAM memory locations can be  
written to in a nonsequential manner using the SPI_MEMR_WR  
command. The SPI_MEMR_WR command code is 00001xxxb,  
where xxxb represent Bits[10:8] of the 11-bit address. The lower  
eight bits of the address should follow this command and then the  
data byte to be written to the address. The lower eight bits of the  
next address are entered, followed by the data for that address  
until all required addresses within that block are written, as  
shown in Figure 94.  
MCR, BBRAM, and packet RAM memory locations can be  
read from memory in a nonsequential manner using the  
SPI_MEMR_RD command. The SPI_MEMR_RD command  
code is 00101xxxb, where xxxb represent Bits[10:8] of the 11-bit  
address. This command is followed by the remaining eight bits  
of the address to be written. Each subsequent address byte is  
then written. The last address byte to be written should be  
followed by two SPI_NOP commands, as shown in Figure 96.  
The data bytes from memory, starting at the first address  
location, are available after the second status byte.  
Program RAM Write  
Example  
The program RAM can be written to only by using the memory  
block write, as illustrated in Figure 93. SPI_MEM_WR should  
be set to 0x1E. See the Downloadable Firmware Modules section  
for details on loading a firmware module to program RAM.  
Read the value stored in the ADC_CONFIG_HIGH register.  
The first five bits of the SPI_MEM_RD command are  
00111.  
Block Read  
The 11-bit address of ADC_CONFIG_HIGH is  
01101011010.  
MCR, BBRAM, and packet RAM memory locations can be read  
from in block format using the SPI_MEM_RD command. The  
SPI_MEM_RD command code is 00111xxxb, where xxxb  
represent Bits[10:8] of the first 11-bit address. This command is  
followed by the remaining eight bits of the address to be read  
and then two SPI_NOP commands (dummy byte). The first byte  
available after writing the address should be ignored, with the second  
byte constituting valid data. If more than one data byte is to be read,  
the write address is automatically incremented for subsequent  
SPI_NOP commands sent. See Figure 95 for more details.  
The first byte sent is 00111011 or 0x3B.  
The second byte sent is 01011010 or 0x5A.  
The third byte sent is 0xFF (SPI_NOP).  
The fourth byte sent is 0xFF.  
Thus, 0x3B5AFFFF is written to the part.  
The value shifted out on the MISO line while the fourth byte is  
sent is the value stored in the ADC_CONFIG_HIGH register.  
CS  
DATA FOR  
DATA FOR  
DATA FOR  
DATA FOR  
SPI_MEM_WR  
IGNORE  
ADDRESS  
STATUS  
MOSI  
MISO  
[ADDRESS]  
[ADDRESS + 1]  
[ADDRESS + 2]  
[ADDRESS + N]  
STATUS  
STATUS  
STATUS  
STATUS  
Figure 93. Memory (MCR, BBRAM, or Packet RAM) Block Write  
CS  
MOSI  
MISO  
DATA FOR  
DATA FOR  
DATA FOR  
SPI_MEMR_WR  
IGNORE  
ADDRESS 1  
STATUS  
ADDRESS 2  
STATUS  
[ADDRESS 1]  
[ADDRESS 2]  
[ADDRESS N]  
STATUS  
STATUS  
STATUS  
Figure 94. Memory (MCR, BBRAM, or Packet RAM) Random Address Write  
MAX N = (256-INITIAL ADDRESS)  
CS  
MOSI  
MISO  
SPI_MEM_RD  
IGNORE  
ADDRESS  
STATUS  
SPI_NOP  
STATUS  
SPI_NOP  
SPI_NOP  
SPI_NOP  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS + 1  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS + N  
Figure 95. Memory(MCR, BBRAM, or Packet RAM) Block Read  
Rev. C | Page 59 of 112  
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
CS  
SPI_MEMR_WR  
IGNORE  
ADDRESS 1  
STATUS  
ADDRESS 2  
STATUS  
ADDRESS 3  
ADDRESS 4  
ADDRESS N  
SPI_NOP  
SPI_NOP  
MOSI  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS N – 2  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS 1  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS 2  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS N –1  
DATA FROM  
ADDRESS N  
MISO  
Figure 96. Memory (MCR, BBRAM, or Packet RAM) Random Address Read  
Rev. C | Page 60 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
LOW POWER MODES  
The ADF7023 can be configured to operate in a broad range of  
energy sensitive applications where battery lifetime is critical.  
This includes support for applications where the ADF7023 is  
required to operate in a fully autonomous mode or applications  
where the host processor controls the transceiver during low  
power mode operation. These low power modes are imple-  
mented using a hardware wake-up controller (WUC), a firmware  
timer, and the smart wake mode functionality of the on-chip  
communications processor. The hardware WUC is a low power  
wake-up controller (WUC) that comprises a 16-bit wake-up  
timer with a programmable prescaler. The 32.768 kHz RCOSC  
or XOSC provides the clock source for the timer.  
The firmware timer is a software timer residing on the ADF7023.  
The firmware timer is used to count the number of WUC timeouts  
and so can be used to count the number of ADF7023 wake-ups.  
The WUC and the firmware timer, therefore, provide a real-  
time clock capability.  
Using the low power WUC and the firmware timer, the SWM  
firmware allows the ADF7023 to wake up autonomously from  
sleep without intervention from the host processor. During this  
wake-up period, the ADF7023 is controlled by the  
communications processor. This functionality allows carrier sense,  
packet sniffing, and packet reception while the host processor is in  
sleep, thereby dramatically reducing overall system current  
consumption. The smart wake mode can then wake the host  
processor on an interrupt condition. An overview of the low  
power mode configuration is shown in Figure 97, and the  
register settings that are used for the various low power modes  
are described in Table 28.  
Table 28. Settings for Low Power Modes  
Low Power Memory  
Mode  
Address  
Register Name  
Bit  
Description  
Deep Sleep 0x30D1  
Modes  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
WUC_BBRAM_EN  
0: BBRAM contents are not retained during  
PHY_SLEEP.  
1: BBRAM contents are retained during  
PHY_SLEEP.  
WUC  
WUC  
WUC  
WUC  
0x30C1  
0x30D1  
0x30D1  
0x30D1  
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
WUC_PRESCALER[2:0]  
WUC_RCOSC_EN  
WUC_XOSC32K_EN  
WUC_CLKSEL  
Sets the prescaler value of the WUC.  
Enables the 32.768 kHz RC OSC.  
Enables the 32.768 kHz external OSC.  
Sets the WUC clock source.  
1: RC OSC selected.  
2: XOSC selected.  
WUC  
WUC  
0x30D1  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
WUC_ARM  
Enable to ensure that the device wakes  
from the PHY_SLEEP state on a WUC  
timeout.  
0x30E2,  
0x30F  
WUC_VALUE_HIGH  
WUC_VALUE_LOW  
WUC_TIMER_VALUE[15:0]  
The WUC timer value.  
WUC Interval(s) =  
(WUC_PRESCALER + 1)  
2
WUC_TIMER_VALUE ×  
32,768  
WUC  
0x101  
0x100  
INTERRUPT_MASK_1  
INTERRUPT_MASK_0  
WUC_TIMEOUT  
Enables the interrupt on a WUC timeout.  
Firmware  
Timer  
INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS  
Enabling this interrupt enables the  
firmware timer. Interrupt is set when the  
NUMBER_OF WAKEUPS count exceeds the  
threshold.  
Firmware  
Timer  
0x102,  
0x103  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_0  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_1  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:0]  
Number of ADF7023 wake-ups.  
Firmware  
Timer  
0x104,  
0x105  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_  
Threshold for the number of ADF7023  
wake-ups. When exceeded, the ADF7023  
exits low power mode.  
_THRESHOLD_0  
THRESHOLD[15:0]  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ  
_THRESHOLD_1  
SWM  
SWM  
0x11A  
0x11A  
MODE_CONTROL  
MODE_CONTROL  
SWM_EN  
Enables smart wake mode.  
SWM_RSSI_QUAL  
Enables RSSI prequalification in smart  
wake mode.  
Rev. C | Page 61 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Low Power Memory  
Mode  
Address  
Register Name  
Bit  
Description  
SWM  
0x108  
SWM_RSSI_THRESH  
SWM_RSSI_THRESH[7:0]  
RSSI threshold for RSSI prequalification.  
RSSI threshold (dBm) =  
SWM_RSSI_THRESH − 107.  
SWM  
SWM  
0x107  
0x106  
PARMTIME_DIVIDER  
RX_DWELL_TIME  
PARMTIME_DIVIDER[7:0]  
RX_DWELL_TIME[7:0]  
Tick rate for the Rx dwell timer.  
Time that the ADF7023 remains awake  
during SWM.  
Receive Dwell Time = RX_DWELL_TIME ×  
6.5 MHz  
128 × PARMTIME_DIVIDER  
SWM  
0x100  
INTERRUPT_MASK_0  
INTERRUPT_SWM_RSSI_DET  
INTERRUPT_PREAMBLE_DETECT  
INTERRUPT_SYNC_DETECT  
INTERRUPT_ADDRESS_MATCH  
Various interrupts that can be used in  
SWM.  
1 It is necessary to write to the 0x30C and 0x30D registers in the following order: WUC_CONFIG_HIGH (Address 0x30C), directly followed by writing to WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
(Address 0x30D).  
2 It is necessary to write to the 0x30E and 0x30F registers in the following order: WUC_VALUE_HIGH(Address 0x30E), directly followed by writing to WUC_VALUE_LOW  
(Address 0x30F).  
Rev. C | Page 62 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
INTERRUPT  
ADF7023  
(IF ENABLED)  
HOST  
PHY_SLEEP  
NO  
NO  
WAIT FOR HOST  
COMMAND  
BBRAM RETAINED?  
YES  
WAIT FOR HOST  
COMMAND  
WUC CONFIGURED?  
YES  
SET WUC_TIMEOUT  
INTERRUPT  
INCREMENT  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS  
SET  
YES  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS  
> THRESHOLD?  
WAIT FOR HOST  
COMMAND  
INTERRUPT_NUM_  
WAKEUPS  
NO  
SWM ENABLED?  
(SWM_EN = 1)  
NO  
YES  
YES  
RSSI QUAL ENABLED?  
(SWM_RSSI_QUAL)  
MEASURE RSSI  
NO  
NO  
RSSI > THRESHOLD  
(SWM_RSSI_THRESH)  
YES  
RSSI INT ENABLED?  
(INTERRUPT_  
SWM_RSSI_DET)  
YES  
SET INTERRUPT_  
SWM_RSSI_DET  
WAIT FOR HOST  
COMMAND  
NO  
YES  
YES  
YES  
SET INTERRUPT_  
PREAMBLE_DETECT  
PREAMBLE  
DETECTED?  
NO AND  
RX_DWELL_TIME  
EXCEEDED  
YES  
SET INTERRUPT_  
SYNC_DETECT  
SYNC WORD  
DETECTED?  
NO  
NO  
YES  
SET INTERRUPT_  
CRC_CORRECT  
CRC  
CORRECT?  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
ADDRESS  
MATCH?  
SET INTERRUPT_  
ADDRESS_MATCH  
YES  
ANY INTERRUPT  
SET?  
WAIT FOR HOST  
COMMAND  
NO  
NO  
TIME IN RX >  
RX_DWELL_TIME?  
YES  
Figure 97. Low Power Mode Operation  
Rev. C | Page 63 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
WUC Mode with Firmware Timer  
EXAMPLE LOW POWER MODES  
In this low power mode, the WUC is used to periodically wake  
the ADF7023 from the PHY_SLEEP state, and the firmware timer  
is used to count the number of WUC timeouts. The combination  
of the WUC and the firmware timer provides a real-time clock  
(RTC) capability.  
Deep Sleep Mode 2  
Deep Sleep Mode 2 is suitable for applications where the host  
processor controls the low power mode timing and the lowest  
possible ADF7023 sleep current is required.  
In this low power mode, the ADF7023 is in the PHY_SLEEP  
state. The BBRAM contents are not retained. This low power  
mode is entered by issuing the CMD_HW_RESET command  
from any radio state. To wake the part from the PHY_SLEEP  
The host processor should set up the WUC and the firmware timer  
before entering the PHY_SLEEP state. The WUC_BBRAM_EN  
(Address 0x30D) should be set to 1 to ensure that the BBRAM  
is retained. The WUC can be configured to time out at some  
standard time interval (for example, 1 sec, 60 sec). On issuing the  
CMD_PHY_SLEEP command, the device enters the PHY_SLEEP  
state for a period until the hardware timer times out. At this  
point, the device wakes up, increments the 16-bit firmware timer  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS, Address 0x102 and Address 0x103)  
and, if WUC_TIMEOUT is enabled (Address 0x101), the device  
asserts the IRQ_GP3 pin. If the16-bit firmware count is less than or  
equal to the user set threshold (NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_  
THRESHOLD, Address 0x104 and Address 0x105), the device  
returns to the PHY_SLEEP state. With this method, the firmware  
count (NUMBER_OF_WA KEUPS) equates to a real time interval.  
CS  
state, the  
pin should be set low. The initialization routine  
after a CMD_HW_RESET command should be followed as  
detailed in the Radio Control section.  
Deep Sleep Mode 1  
Deep Sleep Mode 1 is suitable for applications where the host  
processor controls the low power mode timing and the ADF7023  
configuration is retained during the PHY_SLEEP state.  
In this low power mode, the ADF7023 is in the PHY_SLEEP  
state with the BBRAM contents retained. Before entering the  
PHY_SLEEP state, set WUC_BBRAM_EN (Address 0x30D) to 1  
to ensure that the BBRAM is retained. This low power mode is  
entered by issuing the CMD_PHY_SLEEP command from  
either the PHY_OFF or PHY_ON state. To exit the PHY_SLEEP  
When the firmware count exceeds the user-set threshold  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD), the  
ADF7023 asserts the IRQ_GP3 pin, if the INTERRUPT_NUM_  
WAKEUPS bit (Address 0x100) is set, and enters the PHY_OFF  
state. The operation of this low power mode is illustrated in  
Figure 99.  
CS  
CS  
state, the  
pin can be set low. Then, follow the low  
initialization routine, as detailed in the Radio Control section.  
WUC Mode  
In this low power mode, the hardware WUC is used to wake  
the ADF7023 from the PHY_SLEEP state after a user-defined  
duration. At the end of this duration, the ADF7023 can provide  
an interrupt to the host processor. While the ADF7023 is in the  
PHY_SLEEP state, the host processor can optionally be in a  
deep sleep state to save power.  
Smart Wake Mode (Carrier Sense Only)  
In this low power mode, the WUC, firmware timer, and smart  
wake mode are used to implement periodic RSSI measurements  
on a particular channel (that is, carrier sense). To enable this  
mode, the WUC and firmware timer should be configured  
before entering the PHY_SLEEP state. The WUC_BBRAM_EN  
(Address 0x30D) should be set to 1 to ensure that the BBRAM  
is retained. The RSSI measurement is enabled by setting  
SWM_RSSI_QUAL = 1 and SWM_EN = 1 (Address 0x11A).  
INTERRUPT_SWM_RSSI_DET (Address 0x100) should also be  
enabled. If the measured RSSI value is below the user-defined  
threshold set in the SWM_RSSI_THRESH register (Address  
0x108), the device returns to the PHY_SLEEP state. If the RSSI  
measurement is greater than the SWM_RSSI_THRESH value,  
the device sets the INTERRUPT_SWM_RSSI_DET interrupt to  
alert the host processor and waits in the PHY_ON state for a  
host command. The operation of this low power mode is  
illustrated in Figure 100.  
Before issuing the CMD_PHY_SLEEP command, the host  
processor should configure the WUC and set the firmware  
timer threshold to zero (NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_  
IRQ_THRESHOLD = 0, Address 0x104 and Address 0x105).  
The WUC_BBRAM_EN (Address 0x30D) should be set to 1 to  
ensure that the BBRAM is retained. On issuing the CMD_PHY_  
SLEEP command, the device goes to sleep for a period until the  
hardware timer times out. At this point, the device wakes up,  
and, if WUC_TIMEOUT or INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS  
interrupts are enabled (Address 0x100), the device asserts the  
IRQ_GP3 pin.  
The operation of this low power mode is illustrated in Figure 98.  
Rev. C | Page 64 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Smart Wake Mode  
until all of the packet is received or the packet is recognized as  
invalid (for example, there is an incorrect sync word).  
In this low power mode the WUC, firmware timer, and smart  
wake mode are employed to periodically listen for packets. To  
enable this mode, the WUC and firmware timer should be  
configured and smart wake mode (SWM) enabled (SWM_EN,  
Address 0x11A) before entering the PHY_SLEEP state. The  
WUC_BBRAM_EN (Address 0x30D) should be set to 1 to  
ensure that the BBRAM is retained. RSSI prequalification can  
be optionally enabled (SWM_RSSI_QUAL = 1, Address 0x11A).  
When RSSI prequalification is enabled, the ADF7023 begins  
searching for the preamble only if the RSSI measurement is  
greater than the user-defined threshold.  
This low power mode terminates when a valid packet interrupt  
is received. Alternatively, this low power mode can be terminated  
via a firmware timer timeout. This can be useful if certain radio  
tasks (for example, IR calibration) or processor tasks must be  
run periodically while in the low power mode.  
The operation of this low power mode is illustrated in Figure 101.  
Exiting Low Power Mode  
As described in Figure 97, the ADF7023 waits for a host  
command on any of the termination conditions of the low power  
mode. It is also possible to perform an asynchronous exit from  
low power mode using the following procedure:  
The ADF7023 is in the PHY_RX state for a duration deter-  
mined by the RX_DWELL_TIME setting (Address 0x106). If  
the ADF7023 detects the preamble during the receive dwell  
time, it searches for the sync word. If the sync word routine is  
detected, the ADF7023 loads the received data to packet RAM  
and checks for a CRC and address match, if enabled. If any of  
the receive packet interrupts has been set, the ADF7023 returns  
to the PHY_ON state and waits for a host command.  
CS  
1. Bring the  
pin of the SPI low and wait until the MISO  
output goes high.  
2. Issue a CMD_HW_RESET command.  
The host processor should then follow the initialization  
procedure after a CMD_HW_RESET command, as described in  
the Initialization section.  
If the ADF7023 receives preamble detection during the receive  
dwell time but the remainder of the received packet extends  
beyond the dwell time, the ADF7023 extends the dwell time  
Rev. C | Page 65 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
LOW POWER MODE TIMING DIAGRAMS  
HOST: CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
HOST: START WUC  
ADF7023  
OPERATION  
PHY_OFF OR PHY_ON  
PHY_SLEEP  
PHY_OFF  
WUC TIMEOUT PERIOD  
INTERRUPT  
WUC_TIMEOUT  
(IF ENABLED)  
INTERRUPT  
INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS  
(IF ENABLED AND  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD = 0)  
Figure 98. Low Power Mode Timing When Using the WUC  
HOST: CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
HOST: START WUC  
INCREMENT  
FIRMWARE TIMER  
INCREMENT  
FIRMWARE TIMER  
FIRMWARE TIMER  
> THRESHOLD  
PHY_OFF OR  
ADF7023  
PHY_SLEEP  
PHY_SLEEP  
PHY_SLEEP  
PHY_OFF  
PHY_ON  
OPERATION  
WUC TIMEOUT PERIOD  
WUC TIMEOUT PERIOD × NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD  
REAL TIME INTERNAL  
INTERRUPT_  
NUM_WAKEUPS  
Figure 99. Low Power Mode Timing When Using the WUC and the Firmware Timer  
HOST: CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
HOST: START WUC  
RSSI ≤ THRESHOLD  
RSSI ≤ THRESHOLD  
RSSI > THRESHOLD  
PHY_OFF OR  
PHY_ON  
ADF7023  
OPERATION  
PHY_SLEEP  
RSSI  
PHY_SLEEP  
RSSI  
PHY_SLEEP  
RSSI  
PHY_ON  
WUC TIMEOUT PERIOD  
WUC TIMEOUT PERIOD  
INTERRUPT_  
SWM_RSSI_DET  
Figure 100. Low Power Mode Timing When Using the WUC, Firmware Timer, and SWM with Carrier Sense  
HOST: CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
HOST: START WUC  
NO PACKET  
DETECTED  
NO PACKET  
DETECTED  
PACKET  
DETECTED  
PHY_OFF OR  
PHY_ON  
ADF7023  
OPERATION  
PHY_SLEEP  
RX  
PHY_SLEEP  
RX  
PHY_SLEEP  
PHY_ON  
WUC TIMEOUT PERIOD  
WUC TIMEOUT PERIOD  
INTERRUPT_  
SWM_RSSI_DET  
INTERRUPT_  
PREAMBLE_DETECT  
INTERRUPT_  
SYNC_DETECT  
INTERRUPT_  
CRC_CORRECT  
INTERRUPT_  
ADDRESS_MATCH  
INIT  
PHY_RX  
RECEIVE DWELL TIME  
(RX_DWELL_TIME)  
Figure 101. Low Power Mode Timing When Using the WUC, Firmware Timer, and SWM  
Rev. C | Page 66 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
The relevant fields of each register are detailed in Table 29. All  
four of these registers are write only.  
WUC SETUP  
Circuit Description  
The WUC should be configured as follows:  
The ADF7023 features a low power wake-up controller  
comprising a 16-bit wake-up timer with a 3-bit programmable  
prescaler, as illustrated in Figure 102. The prescaler clock  
source can be configured to use either the 32.76 kHz internal RC  
oscillator (RCOSC) or the 32.76 kHz external oscillator (XOSC).  
This combination of programmable prescaler and 16-bit down  
counter gives a total hardware timer range of 30.52 μs to 36.4  
hours.  
1. Clear all interrupts.  
2. Set required interrupts.  
3. Write to WUC_CONFIG_HIGH and WUC_CONFIG_  
LOW. Ensure that WUC_ARM =1. Ensure that WUC_  
CONFIG_BBRAM_EN =1 (retain BBRAM during  
PHY_SLEEP). It is necessary to write to both registers  
together in the following order: WUC_CONFIG_HIGH  
directly followed by writing to WUC_CONFIG_LOW.  
4. Write to WUC_VALUE_HIGH and WUC_VALUE_LOW.  
This configures the WUC_TIMER_VALUE[15:0] and,  
thus, the WUC timeout period. The timer begins counting  
from the configured value after these registers have been  
written to. It is necessary to write to both registers together  
in the following order: WUC_TIIMER_VALUE_HIGH  
directly followed by writing to WUC_VALUE_LOW.  
Configuration and Operation  
The hardware WUC is configured via the following registers:  
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH (Address 0x30C)  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW (Address 0x30D)  
WUC_VALUE_HIGH (Address 0x30E)  
WUC_VALUE_LOW (Address 0x30F)  
WUC  
WUC_VALUE_HIGH  
WUC_VALUE_LOW  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW[4]  
16-BIT  
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH[2:0]  
RELOAD VALUE  
1
0
RC OSCILLATOR  
32kHz XTAL  
TICK RATE  
32.768kHz  
ADF7023  
WAKE-UP CIRCUIT  
16-BIT DOWN  
COUNTER  
PRESCALER  
WUC_TIMEOUT  
INTERRUPT  
TO FIRMWARE TIMER  
Figure 102. Hardware Wake-Up Controller (WUC)  
Rev. C | Page 67 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 29. WUC Register Settings  
WUC Setting  
Name  
Description  
WUC_VALUE_HIGH [7:0]  
WUC_TIMER_VALUE[15:8]  
WUC timer value.  
(WUC_PRESCALER + 1)  
2
WUC Interval(s) = WUC_TIMER_VALUE  
×
32,768  
WUC_VALUE_LOW[7:0]  
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH[7]  
WUC_TIMER_VALUE[7:0]  
Reserved  
WUC timer value.  
Set to 0.  
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH[6:3] RCOSC_COARSE_CAL_VALUE  
Change in RC  
RCOSC_COARSE_CAL_VALUE Oscillator Frequency  
Coarse Tune State  
State 10  
State 9  
State 8  
State 7  
State 6  
State 5  
State 4  
State 3  
0000  
0001  
1000  
1001  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
0110  
0111  
WUC_PRESCALER  
000  
+83%  
+66%  
+50%  
+33%  
+16%  
0%  
−16%  
−33%  
−50%  
−66%  
State 2  
State 1  
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH[2:0] WUC_PRESCALER  
32.768 kHz Divider  
Tick Period  
30.52 μs  
122.1 μs  
244.1 μs  
488.3 μs  
3.91 ms  
31.25 ms  
250 ms  
1
001  
4
010  
8
011  
16  
100  
128  
1024  
8192  
65,536  
101  
110  
111  
2000 ms  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW[7]  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW[6]  
Reserved  
Set to 0.  
WUC_RCOSC_EN  
1: enable.  
0: disable RCOSC32K.  
1: enable.  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW[5]  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW[4]  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW [3]  
WUC_XOSC32K_EN  
WUC_CLKSEL  
0: disable XOSC32K.  
1: RC 32.768 kHz oscillator.  
0: external crystal oscillator.  
WUC_BBRAM_EN  
1: enable power to BBRAM during the PHY_SLEEP state.  
0: disable power to BBRAM during the PHY_SLEEP state.  
Set to 0.  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW[2:1] Reserved  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW[0] WUC_ARM  
1: enable wake-up on WUC timeout event.  
0: disable wake-up on WUC timeout event.  
Rev. C | Page 68 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Performing a Fine Calibration of the RC Oscillator  
FIRMWARE TIMER SETUP  
This is performed as follows:  
The ADF7023 wakes up from the PHY_SLEEP state at the rate  
set by the WUC. A firmware timer, implemented by the on-chip  
processor, can be used to count the number of hardware wake-ups  
and generate an interrupt to the host processor. Thus, the  
ADF7023 can be used to handle the wake-up timing of the host  
processor, reducing overall system power consumption.  
1. Write to the WUC_CONFIG_HIGH and  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW registers, setting the  
WUC_RCOSC_EN bit high.  
2. Write a 0 to WUC_RCOSC_CAL_EN in the  
WUC_FLAG_RESET register.  
3. Write a 1 to WUC_RCOSC_CAL_EN in the  
WUC_FLAG_RESET register.  
To set up the firmware timer, the host processor must set a value  
in the NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD [15:0]  
registers (Address 0x104 and Address 0x105). This 16-bit value  
represents the number of times the device wakes up before it  
interrupts the host processor. At each wake-up, the ADF7023  
increments the NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:0] register  
(Address 0x103). If this value exceeds the value set by the  
NUMBER_OF_WA KE UPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD[15:0] register,  
the NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:0] value is cleared to 0. At  
this time, if the INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS bit in the  
INTERRUPT_MASK_0 register (Address 0x100) is set, the  
device asserts the IRQ_GP3 pin and enters the PHY_OFF state.  
During calibration, the host microprocessor can write to and  
read from memory locations and issue commands to the  
ADF7023. The RC oscillator calibration status can be viewed in  
the WUC_STATUS register (Location 0x311).  
The result of a fine calibration can be read back from the  
RCOSC_CAL_READBACK_HIGH (Location 0x34F) and  
RCOSC_CAL_READBACK_LOW (Location 0x350) registers.  
A fine calibration typically takes 1.5 ms.  
Performing a Coarse Calibration of the RC Oscillator  
This calibration involves performing fine calibrations of the RC  
oscillator for different values of RCOSC_COARSE_CAL_VALUE  
to determine the optimum value to be written to  
CALIBRATING THE RC OSCILLATOR  
There are two types of RC oscillator calibration, fine and coarse  
calibrations. A fine calibration of the RC oscillator is automatically  
performed upon wake up from PHY_SLEEP and upon cold  
start. The user can also manually initiate a fine calibration.  
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH (Location 0x30C[6:3]).  
The coarse calibration procedure is outlined in Figure 103.  
Typically, the optimum coarse tune state is State 5, and the  
algorithm starts in this state to minimize the number of iterations.  
To meet the quoted RC oscillator frequency accuracy given in  
the Specifications section, it is necessary to perform a coarse  
calibration of the RC oscillator.  
Usually, the optimum RCOSC_COARSE_CAL_VALUE is  
determined at 25°C once, and the result stored in the host  
microprocessor. This result can be incorporated in the value  
written to WUC_CONFIG_HIGH prior to fine calibrations of  
the RC oscillator.  
Rev. C | Page 69 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
SET i = 5  
SET COARSE CAL STATE = i  
INITIATE FINE CAL AND  
WAIT 1.25ms  
READBACK FINE CAL RESULT (i) AND CALCULATE  
FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i) = FINE_CAL_CODE(i) – 300  
NO  
YES  
INCREMENT i  
SET COARSE CAL STATE = i  
IS FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i)  
POSITIVE?  
DECREMENT i  
SET COARSE CAL STATE = i  
INITIATE FINE CAL AND  
WAIT 1.25ms  
INITIATE FINE CAL AND  
WAIT 1.25ms  
READBACK FINE CAL RESULT (i) AND CALCULATE  
FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i) = FINE_CAL_CODE(i) – 300  
READBACK FINE CAL RESULT (i) AND CALCULATE  
FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i) = FINE_CAL_CODE(i) – 300  
YES  
NO  
YES  
NO  
IS ABS(FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i))  
< ABS(FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i–1))?  
IS ABS(FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i))  
< ABS(FINE_CAL_CODE_DELTA(i+1))?  
NO  
NO  
IS i = 10?  
YES  
IS i = 1?  
YES  
EXIT  
OPTIMUM COARSE CAL  
STATE = 10  
EXIT  
OPTIMUM COARSE CAL  
STATE = i–1  
EXIT  
OPTIMUM COARSE CAL  
STATE = 1  
EXIT  
OPTIMUM COARSE CAL  
STATE = i+1  
Figure 103. RC Oscillator Coarse Calibration Algorithm  
Rev. C | Page 70 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
DOWNLOADABLE FIRMWARE MODULES  
The program RAM memory of the ADF7023 can be used to  
store firmware modules for the communications processor that  
provide the ADF7023 with extra functionality. The binary code  
for these firmware modules and detail on their functionality are  
available from Analog Devices. Three modules are briefly  
described in this section, namely, image rejection calibration,  
AES encryption and decryption, and Reed Solomon coding.  
REED SOLOMON CODING MODULE  
This coding module uses Reed Solomon block coding to detect  
and correct errors in the received packet. A transmit message of  
k bytes in length, is appended with an error checking code  
(ECC) of length n − k bytes to give a total message length of  
n bytes, as shown in Figure 104.  
n BYTES  
WRITING A MODULE TO PROGRAM RAM  
SYNC  
WORD  
PREAMBLE  
ECC  
PAYLOAD  
k BYTES  
The sequence to write a firmware module to program RAM is  
as follows:  
(n – k) BYTES  
1. Ensure that the ADF7023 is in PHY_OFF.  
Figure 104. Packet Structure with Appended Reed Solomon  
Error Check Code (ECC)  
2. Issue the CMD_RAM_LOAD_INIT command.  
3. Write the module to program RAM using an SPI memory  
block write (see the SPI Interface section).  
The receiver decodes the ECC to detect and correct up to t bytes  
in error, where t = (n − k)/2. The firmware supports correction  
of up to five bytes in the n byte field. To correct t bytes in error,  
an ECC length of 2t bytes is required, and the byte errors can be  
randomly distributed throughout the payload and ECC fields.  
4. Issue the CMD_RAM_LOAD_DONE command.  
The firmware module is now stored on program RAM.  
IMAGE REJECTION CALIBRATION MODULE  
Reed Solomon coding exhibits excellent burst error correction  
capability and is commonly used to improve the robustness of a  
radio link in the presence of transient interference or due to  
rapid signal fading conditions that can corrupt sections of the  
message payload.  
The calibration system initially disables the ADF7023 receiver,  
and an internal RF source is applied to the RF input at the  
image frequency. The algorithm then maximizes the receiver  
image rejection performance by iteratively minimizing the  
quadrature gain and phase errors in the polyphase filter.  
Reed Solomon coding is also capable of improving the receiver’s  
sensitivity performance by several dB, where random errors  
tend to dominate under low SNR conditions and the receiver’s  
packet error rate performance is limited by thermal noise.  
The calibration algorithm takes its initial estimates for quadra-  
ture phase correction (Address 0x118) and quadrature gain  
correction (Address 0x119) from BBRAM. After calibration,  
new optimum values of phase and gain are loaded back into  
these locations. These calibration values are maintained in  
BBRAM during sleep mode and are automatically reapplied  
from a wake-up event, which keeps the number of calibrations  
required to a minimum.  
The number of consecutive bit errors that can be 100%  
corrected is {(t − 1) × 8 + 1}. Longer, random bit-error patterns,  
up to t bytes, can also be corrected if the error patterns start and  
end at byte boundaries.  
Depending on the initial values of quadrature gain and phase  
correction, the calibration algorithm can take approximately  
20 ms to find the optimum image rejection performance.  
However, the calibration time can be significantly less than this  
when the seed values used for gain and phase correction are  
close to optimum.  
The firmware also takes advantage of an on-chip hardware  
accelerator module to enhance throughput and minimize the  
latency of the Reed Solomon processing.  
AES ENCRYPTION AND DECRYPTION MODULE  
The downloadable AES firmware module supports 128-bit  
block encryption and decryption with key sizes of 128 bits,  
192 bits, and 256 bits. Two modes are supported: ECB mode  
and CBC Mode 1. ECB mode simply encrypts/decrypts on a  
128-bit block by block with a single secret key as illustrated in  
Figure 105. CBC Mode 1 encrypts after first adding (Modulo 2),  
a 128-bit user supplied initialization vector. The resulting  
cipher text is then used as the initialization vector for the next  
block and so forth, as illustrated in Figure 106. Decryption  
provides the inverse functionality. The firmware also takes  
advantage of an on-chip hardware accelerator module to  
enhance throughput and minimize the latency of the AES  
processing.  
The image rejection performance is also dependent on  
temperature. To maintain optimum image rejection  
performance, a calibration should be activated whenever a  
temperature change of more than 10°C occurs. The ADF7023  
on-chip temperature sensor can be used to determine when the  
temperature exceeds this limit.  
Rev. C | Page 71 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
ECB MODE  
128 BITS  
PLAIN TEXT  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
KEY  
KEY  
KEY  
AES  
AES  
AES  
ENCRYPT  
ENCRYPT  
ENCRYPT  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
CYPHER TEXT  
Figure 105. ECB Mode.  
CBC MODE 1  
128 BITS  
PLAIN TEXT  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
INITIAL VECTOR  
+
+
+
+
KEY  
KEY  
KEY  
KEY  
AES  
AES  
AES  
AES  
ENCRYPT  
ENCRYPT  
ENCRYPT  
ENCRYPT  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
128 BITS  
CYPHER TEXT  
Figure 106. CBC Mode 1  
Rev. C | Page 72 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
RADIO BLOCKS  
(2FSK, GFSK, or OOK) and the data rate. This ensures optimum  
modulation quality for each data rate. On entering the PHY_RX  
state, the communications processor sets a narrow bandwidth to  
ensure best receiver rejection. In all, there are eight bandwidth  
configurations. Each synthesizer bandwidth setting is described  
in Table 30.  
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER  
A fully integrated RF frequency synthesizer is used to generate  
both the transmit signal and the receivers local oscillator (LO)  
signal. The architecture of the frequency synthesizer is shown in  
Figure 107.  
The receiver uses a fractional-N frequency synthesizer to generate  
the mixer’s LO for down conversion to the intermediate frequency  
(IF) of 200 kHz or 300 kHz. In transmit mode, a high resolution  
sigma-delta (Σ-Δ) modulator is used to generate the required  
frequency deviations at the RF output when FSK data is  
transmitted. To reduce the occupied FSK bandwidth, the  
transmitted bit stream can be filtered using a digital Gaussian filter,  
which is enabled via the RADIO_CFG_9 register (Address 0x115).  
The Gaussian filter uses a bandwidth time (BT) of 0.5.  
Table 30. Automatic Synthesizer Bandwidth Selections  
Closed Loop  
Synthesizer  
Bandwidth (kHz)  
Data Rate  
(kbps)  
Description  
Rx 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Tx 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Tx 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Tx 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Tx 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Tx 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Tx 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Tx OOK  
All  
92  
1 to 49.5  
49.6 to 99.1  
99.2 to 129.5  
129.6 to 179.1 226  
179.2 to 239.9 305  
130  
174  
174  
The VCO and the PLL loop filter of the ADF7023 are fully  
integrated. To reduce the effect of pulling of the VCO by the  
power-up of the PA and to minimize spurious emissions, the VCO  
operates at twice or four times the RF frequency. The VCO signal  
is then divided by 2 or 4, giving the required frequency for the  
transmitter and the required LO frequency for the receiver.  
240 to 300  
All  
382  
185  
Synthesizer Settling  
After the VCO calibration, a 56 μs delay is allowed for synthesizer  
settling. This delay is fixed at 56 μs by default and ensures that  
the synthesizer has fully settled when using any of the default  
synthesizer bandwidths.  
A high speed, fully automatic calibration scheme is used to  
ensure that the frequency and amplitude characteristic of the  
VCO are maintained over temperature, supply voltage, and  
process variations.  
However, in some cases, it may be necessary to use a custom  
synthesizer settling delay. To use a custom delay, set the  
CUSTOM_TRX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME EN bit to 1 in the  
MODE_CONTROL register (Address 0x11A). The synthesizer  
settling delays for the PHY_RX and PHY_TX state transitions  
can be set independently in RX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME register  
(Address 0x13E) and the TX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME register  
(Address 0x13F). The settling time can be set in the range 2 μs  
to 512 μs in steps of 2 μs.  
The calibration is automatically performed when the  
CMD_PHY_RX or CMD_PHY_TX command is issued.  
The calibration duration is 142 µs, and if required, the  
CALIBRATION_STATUS register (Address 0x339) can be  
polled to indicate the completion of the VCO self-calibration.  
After the VCO is calibrated, the frequency synthesizer settles to  
within 5 ppm of the target frequency in 56 µs.  
VCO  
CALIBRATION  
Bypassing VCO Calibration  
RF  
FREQ  
26MHz  
REF  
It is possible to bypass the VCO calibration for ultrafast frequency  
hopping in transmit or receive. The calibration data for each RF  
channel should be stored in the host processor memory. The  
calibration data comprises two values: the VCO band select  
value and the VCO amplitude level.  
CHARGE  
PUMP  
÷2 OR  
÷4  
PFD  
VCO  
LOOP  
FILTER  
N DIVIDER  
÷2  
TX  
DATA  
Read and Store Calibration Data  
FRAC-N  
Σ-Δ DIVIDER  
GAUSSIAN  
FILTER  
1. Go to the PHY_TX or PHY_RX state without bypassing  
the VCO calibration.  
INTEGER-N  
F_DEVIATION  
2. Read the following MCR registers and store the calibrated  
data in memory on the host processor:  
Figure 107. RF Frequency Synthesizer Architecture  
Synthesizer Bandwidth  
a. VCO_BAND_READBACK (Address 0x3DA)  
b. VCO_AMPL_READBACK (Address 0x3DB)  
The synthesizer loop filter is fully integrated on chip and has a  
programmable bandwidth. The communications processor  
automatically sets the bandwidth of the synthesizer when the  
device enters PHY_TX or PHY_RX state. On entering the  
PHY_TX state, the communications processor chooses the  
bandwidth based on the programmed modulation scheme  
Rev. C | Page 73 of 112  
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 31. Crystal Frequency Pulling Programming  
Bypassing VCO Calibration on CMD_PHY_TX or  
CMD_PHY_RX  
XOSC_CAP_DAC  
Pulling (ppm)  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
+15  
+11.25  
+7.5  
+3.75  
0
−3.75  
−7.5  
1. Ensure that the BBRAM is configured.  
2. Set VCO_OVRW_EN (Address 0x3CD) = 0x3.  
3. Set VCO_CAL_CFG (Address 0x3D0) = 0x0F.  
4. Set VCO_BAND_OVRW_VAL (Address 0x3CB) = stored  
VCO_BAND_READBACK (Address 0x3DA) for that  
channel.  
5. Set VCO_AMPL_OVRW_VAL (Address 0x3CC)= stored  
VCO_AMPL_READBACK (Address 0x3DB) for that  
channel.  
6. Set SYNTH_CAL_EN = 0 (in the CALIBRATION_  
CONTROL register, Address 0x338).  
7. Set SYNTH_CAL_EN = 1 (in the CALIBRATION_  
CONTROL register, Address 0x338).  
−11.25  
MODULATION  
The ADF7023 supports binary frequency shift keying (2FSK),  
minimum shift keying (MSK), binary level Gaussian filtered  
2FSK (GFSK), Gaussian filtered MSK (GMSK), and on-off  
keying (OOK). The desired transmit and receive modulation  
formats are set in the RADIO_CFG_9 register (Address 0x115).  
8. Issue CMD_PHY_TX or CMD_PHY_RX to go to the  
PHY_TX or PHY_RX state without the VCO calibration.  
When using 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK modulation, the frequency  
deviation can be set using the FREQ_DEVIATION[11:0]  
parameter in the RADIO_CFG_1 register (Address 0x10D) and  
RADIO_CFG_1 register (Address 0x10E). The data rate can be  
set in the 1 kbps to 300 kbps range using the DATA_RATE[11:0]  
parameter in the RADIO_CFG_0 register (Address 0x10C) and  
RADIO_CFG_1 register (Address 0x10D). For GFSK/GMSK  
modulation, the Gaussian filter uses a fixed bandwidth time  
(BT) product of 0.5.  
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR  
A 26 MHz crystal oscillator operating in parallel mode must be  
connected between the XOSC26P and XOSC26N pins. Two  
parallel loading capacitors are required for oscillation at the  
correct frequency. Their values are dependent upon the crystal  
specification. They should be chosen to ensure that the shunt  
value of capacitance added to the PCB track capacitance and the  
input pin capacitance of the ADF7023 equals the specified load  
capacitance of the crystal, usually 10 pF to 20 pF. Track capacitance  
values vary from 2 pF to 5 pF, depending on board layout. The  
total load capacitance is described by  
When using OOK modulation, it is recommended to enable  
Manchester encoding (MANCHESTER_ENC = 1, Address  
0x11C). The data rate can be set in the 2.4 kbps to 19.2 kbps  
range (4.8 kcps to 38.4 kcps Manchester encoded) using the  
DATA_RATE[11:0] parameter in the RADIO_CFG_0 register  
(Address 0x10C) and RADIO_CFG_1 register (Address 0x10D).  
C
1
PIN  
2
CLOAD  
=
+
+ C  
PCB  
1
1
+
C
C
1
2
RF OUTPUT STAGE  
Power Amplifier (PA)  
where:  
LOAD is the total load capacitance.  
C1 and C2 are the external crystal load capacitors.  
PIN is the ADF7023 input capacitance of the XOSC26P and  
XOSC26N pins and is equal to 2.1pF.  
PCB is the PCB track capacitance.  
C
The ADF7023 PA can be configured for single-ended or  
differential output operation using the PA_SINGLE_DIFF_SEL  
bit in the RADIO_CFG_8 register (Address 0x114). The PA  
level is set by the PA_LEVEL bit in the RADIO_CFG_8 register  
and has a range of 0 to 15. For finer control of the output power  
level, the PA_LEVEL_MCR register (Address 0x307) can be  
used. It offers more resolution with a setting range of 0 to 63.  
The relationship between the PA_LEVEL and PA_LEVEL_MCR  
settings is given by  
C
C
When possible, choose capacitors that have a very low  
temperature coefficient to ensure stable frequency operation  
over all conditions.  
The crystal frequency error can be corrected by means of an  
integrated digital tuning varactor. For a typical crystal load  
capacitance of 10 pF, a tuning range of +15 ppm to −11.25 ppm  
is available via programming of a 3-bit DAC, according to Table 31.  
The 3-bit value should be written to XOSC_CAP_DAC in the  
OSC_CONFIG register (Address 0x3D2).  
PA_LEVEL_MCR = 4 × PA_LEVEL + 3  
The single-ended configuration can deliver 13.5 dBm output  
power. The differential PA can deliver 10 dBm output power  
and allows a straightforward interface to dipole antennae. The  
two PA configurations offer a Tx antenna diversity capability.  
Note that the two PAs cannot be enabled at the same time.  
Alternatively, any error in the RF frequency due to crystal error  
can be adjusted for by offsetting the RF channel frequency using  
the RF channel frequency setting in BBRAM memory.  
Rev. C | Page 74 of 112  
 
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Automatic PA Ramp  
For channel bandwidths of 100 kHz to 200 kHz, an IF frequency of  
200 kHz is used, which results in an image frequency located  
400 kHz below the wanted RF frequency. When the 300 kHz  
bandwidth is selected, an IF frequency of 300 kHz is used, and the  
image frequency is located at 600 kHz below the wanted frequency.  
The ADF7023 has built-in up and down PA ramping for both  
single-ended and differential PAs. There are eight ramp rate  
settings, with the ramp rate defined as a certain number of PA  
power level settings per data bit period. The PA_RAMP variable  
in the RADIO_CFG_8 register (Address 0x114) sets this PA  
ramp rate, as illustrated in Figure 108.  
The bandwidth and center frequency of the IF filter are calibrated  
automatically after entering the PHY_ON state if the BB_CAL  
bit is set in the MODE_CONTROL register (Address 0x11A).  
The filter calibration time takes 100 µs.  
1
2
3
4
...  
8
... 16  
DATA BITS  
The IF bandwidth is programmed by setting the IFBW field in  
the RADIO_CFG_9 register (Address 0x115). The filters pass  
band is centered at an IF frequency of 200 kHz when bandwidths  
of 100 kHz to 200 kHz are used and centered at 300 kHz when  
an IF bandwidth of 300 kHz is used.  
PA RAMP 0  
(NO RAMP)  
PA RAMP 1  
(256 CODES PER BIT)  
PA RAMP 2  
(128 CODES PER BIT)  
PA RAMP 3  
(64 CODES PER BIT)  
IMAGE CHANNEL REJECTION  
PA RAMP 4  
(32 CODES PER BIT)  
The ADF7023 is capable of providing improved receiver image  
rejection performance by the use of a fully integrated image  
rejection calibration system under the control of the on-chip  
communications processor. To operate the calibration system, a  
firmware module is downloaded to the on-chip program RAM.  
The firmware download is supplied by Analog Devices and  
described in the Downloadable Firmware Modules section.  
PA RAMP 5  
(16 CODES PER BIT)  
PA RAMP 6  
(8 CODES PER BIT)  
PA RAMP 7  
(4 CODES PER BIT)  
Figure 108. PA Ramp for Different PA_RAMP Settings  
The PA ramps to the level set by the PA_LEVEL or PA_LEVEL_  
MCR settings. Enabling the PA ramp reduces spectral splatter  
and helps meet radio regulations (for example, the ETSI EN 300  
220 standard), which limit PA transient spurious emissions. To  
ensure optimum performance, an adequately long PA ramp rate  
is required based on the data rate and the PA output power setting.  
The PA_RAMP setting should, therefore, be set such that  
To achieve the typical uncalibrated image attenuation values given  
in the Specifications section, it is required to use recommended  
default values for IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_PHASE (Address 0x118)  
and IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_AMPLITUDE (Address 0x119).  
To achieve the specified uncalibrated image attenuation at  
433 MHz, set IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_AMPLITUDE = 0x03  
and IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_PHASE = 0x08.  
PA_LEVEL_MCR[5:0]  
DATA_RATE[11:0]  
Ramp Rate (Codes/Bit) ≤ 10,000 ×  
To achieve the specified uncalibrated image attenuation at  
868 MHz/915 MHz, set IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_AMPLITUDE =  
0x07 and IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_PHASE = 0x16.  
where PA_LEVEL_MCR is related to the PA_LEVEL setting by  
PA_LEVEL_MCR = 4 × PA_LEVEL + 3.  
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (AGC)  
PA/LNA INTERFACE  
AGC is enabled by default, and keeps the receiver gain at the  
correct level by selecting the LNA, mixer, and filter gain settings  
based on the measured RSSI level. The LNA has three gain levels,  
the mixer has gain two levels, and the filter has three gain levels.  
In all, there are six AGC stages, which are defined in Table 32.  
The ADF7023 supports both single-ended and differential PA  
outputs. Only one PA can be active at one time. The differential  
PA and LNA share the same pins, RFIO_1P and RFIO_1N,  
which facilitate a simpler antenna interface. The single-ended  
PA output is available on the RFO2 pin. A number of PA/LNA  
antenna matching options are possible and are described in the  
PA/LNA section.  
Table 32. AGC Gain Modes  
Gain Mode  
LNA Gain  
Mixer Gain  
High  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Filter Gain  
High  
High  
High  
High  
1
2
3
4
5
6
High  
High  
Medium  
Low  
Low  
RECEIVE CHANNEL FILTER  
The receivers channel filter is a fourth order, active polyphase  
Butterworth filter with programmable bandwidths of 100 kHz,  
150 kHz, 200 kHz, and 300 kHz. The fourth order filter gives  
very good interference suppression of adjacent and neigh-  
boring channels and also suppresses the image channel by  
approximately 36 dB at a 100 kHz IF bandwidth and an RF  
frequency of 868 MHz or 915 MHz.  
Low  
Low  
Medium  
Low  
Low  
Rev. C | Page 75 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
The AGC remains at each gain stage for a time defined by the  
AGC_CLK_DIVIDE register (Address 0x32F). The default value of  
AGC_CLK_DIVIDE = 0x28 gives an AGC delay of 25 μs. When  
the RSSI is above AGC_HIGH_THRESHOLD (Address 0x35F),  
the gain is reduced. When the RSSI is below AGC_LOW_  
THRESHOLD (Address 0x35E), the gain is increased.  
RSSI Method 2  
The CMD_GET_RSSI command can be used from the PHY_ON  
state to read the RSSI. This RSSI measurement method uses  
additional low pass filtering, resulting in a more accurate RSSI  
reading. The RSSI result is loaded to the RSSI_READBACK  
register (Address 0x312) by the communications processor. The  
RSSI_READBACK register contains a twos complement value  
and can be converted to input power in dBm using the following  
formula:  
The AGC can be configured to remain active while in the  
PHY_RX state or can be locked on preamble detection. The  
AGC can also be set to manual mode, in which case the host  
processor must set the LNA, filter, and mixer gains by writing  
to the AGC_MODE register (Address 0x35D). The AGC  
operation is set by the AGC_LOCK_MODE setting in the  
RADIO_CFG_7 register (Address 0x113) and is described in  
Table 33.  
RSSI(dBm) = RSSI_READBACK − 107  
RSSI Method 3  
This method supports the measurement of RSSI by the host  
processor at any time while in the PHY_RX state. The receiver  
input power can be calculated using the following procedure:  
The LNA, filter and mixer gains can be read back through the  
AGC_GAIN_STATUS register (Address 0x360).  
1. Set AGC to hold by setting the AGC_MODE register  
(Address 0x35D) = 0x40 (only necessary if AGC has not  
been locked on the preamble or sync word).  
2. Read back the AGC gain settings (AGC_GAIN_STATUS  
register, Address 0x360).  
3. Read the ADC_READBACK[7:0] value (Address 0x327  
and Address 0x328; see the Analog-to-Digital Converter  
section).  
4. Re-enable the AGC by setting the AGC_MODE register  
(Address 0x35D) = 0x00 (only necessary if AGC has not  
already been locked on the preamble or sync word).  
5. Calculate the RSSI in dBm as follows:  
Table 33. AGC Operation  
AGC_LOCK_MODE  
Bits in RADIO_CFG_7  
Register  
Description  
0
1
AGC is free running.  
AGC is disabled. Gains must be set  
manually.  
2
3
AGC is held at the current gain level.  
AGC is locked on preamble detection.  
RSSI  
The RSSI is based on a successive compression, log-amp  
architecture following the analog channel filter. The analog  
RSSI level is digitized by an 8-bit SAR ADC for user readback  
and for use by the digital AGC controller.  
RSSI(dBm) =  
1
ADC _ READBACK[7:0] × + Gain _Correction 109  
7
where Gain_Correction is determined by the value of the  
AGC_GAIN_STATUS register (Address 0x360) as shown  
in Table 34.  
The ADF7023 has a total of four RSSI measurement functions  
that support a wide range of applications. These functions can be  
used to implement carrier sense (CS) or clear channel assessment  
(CCA). In packet mode, the RSSI is automatically recorded in MCR  
memory and is available for user readback after receipt of a packet.  
Table 34. Gain Mode Correction for 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
RSSI  
AGC_GAIN_STATUS  
(Address 0x360)  
Table 36 details the four RSSI measurement methods.  
GAIN_CORRECTION  
RSSI Method 1  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x0A  
0x12  
0x16  
44  
35  
26  
17  
10  
0
When a valid packet is received in packet mode, the RSSI level  
during postamble is automatically loaded to the RSSI_READBACK  
register (Address 0x312) by the communications processor. The  
RSSI_READBACK register contains a twos complement value  
and can be converted to input power in dBm using  
RSSI(dBm) = RSSI_READBACK − 107  
To simplify the RSSI calculation, the following approximation  
can be used by the host processor:  
To extend the linear range of RSSI measurement down to an  
input power of −110 dBm (see Figure 69), a cosine adjustment  
can be applied using the following formula:  
1
7
1
8
1
8
1
1 +  
+
64  
RSSI(dBm) =  
8
COS  
× RSSI_READBACK − 106  
RSSI _ READBACK  
where COS(X) is the cosine of Angle X (radians).  
Rev. C | Page 76 of 112  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
RSSI Method 4  
where Gain_Correction is determined by the value of the  
AGC_GAIN_STATUS register (Address 0x360) as shown in  
Table 35.  
This method is used to provide RSSI readback when using OOK  
demodulation in the PHY_RX state. The receiver input power  
can be calculated using the following procedure:  
Table 35. Gain Mode Correction for OOK RSSI  
AGC_GAIN_STATUS  
(Address 0x360)  
1. Set AGC to hold by setting the AGC_MODE register  
(Address 0x35D) = 0x40 (only necessary if AGC has not  
been locked on the preamble or sync word).  
2. Read back the AGC gain settings (AGC_GAIN_STATUS  
register, Address 0x360).  
3. Read the AGC_ADC_WORD[6:0] value (Address 0x361).  
4. Re-enable the AGC by setting the AGC_MODE register  
(Address 0x35D) = 0x00 (only necessary if AGC has not  
already been locked on the preamble or sync word).  
5. Calculate the RSSI in dBm as follows:  
GAIN_CORRECTION  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x0A  
0x12  
0x16  
47  
37  
28  
19  
10  
0
To simplify the RSSI calculation, the following approximation  
can be used by the host processor:  
2
7
2
7
2
8
1
8
1
RSSI(dBm) = (AGC_ADC_WORD[6:0] ×  
+
1+  
+
64  
Gain_Correction) − 110  
Table 36. Summary of RSSI Measurement Methods  
RSSI  
Method  
Available in  
Modulation Packet Mode  
Available in  
Sport Mode  
RSSI Type  
Description  
1
Automatic end of  
packet RSSI  
2FSK/GFSK/ Yes  
MSK/GMSK  
No  
Automatic RSSI measurement during reception of  
the postamble in packet mode. The RSSI result is  
available in the RSSI_READBACK register  
(Address 0x312).  
2
3
4
CMD_GET_RSSI  
command from  
PHY_ON  
RSSI via ADC and AGC 2FSK/GFSK/ Yes  
readback, FSK MSK/GMSK  
2FSK/GFSK/ Yes  
MSK/GMSK  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Automatic RSSI measurement from PHY_ON using  
CMD_GET_RSSI. The RSSI result is available in the  
RSSI_READBACK register (Address 0x312).  
RSSI measurement based on the ADC and AGC  
gain readbacks. The host processor calculates RSSI  
in dBm.  
RSSI measurement based on the ADC and AGC  
gain readbacks. The host processor calculates RSSI  
in dBm.  
RSSI via ADC and AGC OOK  
readback, OOK  
Yes  
Rev. C | Page 77 of 112  
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
The value of K is then determined by  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK DEMODULATION  
A correlator demodulator is used for 2FSK, GFSK, MSK, and  
GMSK demodulation. The quadrature outputs of the IF filter  
are first limited and then fed to a digital frequency correlator  
that performs filtering and frequency discrimination of the  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK spectrum. Data is recovered by  
comparing the output levels from two correlators. The performance  
of this frequency discriminator approximates that of a matched  
filter detector, which is known to provide optimum detection in  
the presence of additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN). This  
method of 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK demodulation provides  
approximately 3 dB to 4 dB better sensitivity than a linear  
frequency discriminator. The 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
demodulator architecture is shown in Figure 109. The ADF7023  
is configured for 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/ GMSK demodulation by  
setting DEMOD_SCHEME = 0 in the RADIO_CFG_9 register  
(Address 0x115).  
IF _ Freq  
MI ≥ 1, AFC off: K = Floor  
FSK _ Dev  
MI < 1, AFC off: K = Floor  
IF _ Freq  
Datarate  
2
IF _ Freq  
FSK _ Dev + Freq _ Error _ Max  
MI ≥ 1, AFC on: K = Floor  
MI < 1, AFC on: K = Floor  
IF _ Freq  
Datarate  
+ Freq _ Error _ Max  
2
where:  
MI is the modulation index.  
K is the discriminator coefficient.  
To optimize receiver sensitivity, the correlator bandwidth and  
phase must be optimized for the specific deviation frequency,  
data rate, and maximum expected frequency error between the  
transmitter and receiver. The bandwidth and phase of the  
discriminator must be set using the DISCRIM_BW bit in the  
RADIO_CFG_3 register (Address 0x10F) and the DISCRIM_  
PHASE[1:0] bit in the RADIO_CFG_6 register (Address  
0x112). The discriminator setup is performed in three steps.  
Floor[] is a function to round down to the nearest integer.  
IF_Freq is the IF frequency in hertz (200 kHz or 300 kHz).  
FSK_Dev is the 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK frequency deviation  
in hertz.  
Freq_Error_Max is the maximum expected frequency error, in  
hertz, between Tx and Rx.  
Step 2: Calculate the DISCRIM_BW Setting  
The bandwidth setting of the discriminator is calculated based  
on the Discriminator Coefficient K and the IF frequency. The  
bandwidth is set using the DISCRIM_BW setting (Address  
0x10F), which is calculated according to  
Step 1: Calculate the Discriminator Bandwidth  
Coefficient K  
The Discriminator Bandwidth Coefficient K depends on the  
modulation index (MI), which is determined by  
K × 3.25 MHz  
IF _ Freq  
DISCRIM_BW[7:0] = Round  
2 × FSK _ Dev  
MI =  
Datarate  
Step 3: Calculate the DISCRIM_PHASE Setting  
where FSK_Dev is the 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK frequency  
deviation in hertz (Hz), measured from the carrier to the +1  
symbol frequency (positive frequency deviation) or to the −1  
symbol frequency (negative frequency deviation), and Datarate  
is the data rate in bits per second (bps).  
The phase setting of the discriminator is calculated based on the  
Discriminator Coefficient K, as described in Table 37. The  
phase is set using the DISCRIM_PHASE[1:0] value in the  
RADIO_CFG_6 register (Address 0x112).  
Table 37. Setting the DISCRIM_PHASE[1:0] Value Based on K  
K
K/2  
(K + 1)/2  
DISCRIM_PHASE[1:0]  
Even  
Odd  
Even  
Odd  
Odd  
0
1
2
3
Even  
Even  
Odd  
Rev. C | Page 78 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
SPORT MODE  
GPIOS  
COMMUNICATIONS PROCESSOR  
FREQUENCY  
CORRELATOR  
POST-DEMOD  
FILTER  
IF FILTER  
LIMITERS  
I
MIXER  
LNA  
RxDATA/  
RxCLK  
CLOCK AND  
DATA  
RECOVERY  
RFIO_1P  
RFIO_1N  
PREAMBLE  
DETECT  
Q
IF  
SYNC WORD  
DETECT  
POST_DEMOD_BW[7:0]  
DATA_RATE[11:0]  
DISCRIM_PHASE[1:0]  
IFBW[1:0]  
(ADDRESS RADIO_CFG_9[7:6])  
DISCRIM_BW[7:0]  
PREAMBLE_MATCH = 0  
AFC SYSTEM  
T
2
AVERAGING  
FILTER  
RF  
PI  
RANGE  
SYNTHESIZER  
(LO)  
CONTROL  
AFC LOCK  
MAX_AFC_RANGE[7:0]  
AFC_LOCK_MODE[1:0]  
AFC_KI[3:0] (ADDRESS RADIO_CFG_11[7:4])  
AFC_KP[3:0]  
Figure 109. 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK Demodulation and AFC Architecture  
AFC  
AFC is enabled by setting AFC_LOCK_MODE in the  
RADIO_CFG_10 register (Address 0x116), as described in  
Table 38.  
The ADF7023 features an internal real-time automatic  
frequency control loop. In receive, the control loop automatically  
monitors the frequency error during the packet preamble  
sequence and adjusts the receiver synthesizer local oscillator  
using proportional integral (PI) control. The AFC frequency  
error measurement bandwidth is targeted specifically at the  
packet preamble sequence (dc free). AFC is supported during  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK demodulation.  
Table 38. AFC Mode  
AFC_LOCK_MODE[1:0] Mode  
0
1
2
3
Free running: AFC is free running.  
Disabled: AFC is disabled.  
Hold: AFC is paused.  
Lock: AFC locks after the preamble or  
sync word.  
AFC can be configured to lock on detection of the qualified  
preamble or on detection of the qualified sync word. To lock AFC  
on detection of the qualified preamble, set AFC_LOCK_MODE =  
3 (Address 0x116) and ensure that preamble detection is enabled in  
the PREAMBLE_MATCH register (Address 0x11B). AFC lock  
is released if the sync word is not detected immediately after the  
end of the preamble. In packet mode, if the qualified preamble  
is followed by a qualified sync word, the AFC lock is maintained  
for the duration of the packet. In sport mode, the AFC lock is  
released on transitioning back to the PHY_ON state or when a  
CMD_PHY_RX is issued while in the PHY_RX state.  
The bandwidth of the AFC loop can be controlled by the  
AFC_KI and AFC_KP parameters in the RADIO_CFG_11  
register (Address 0x117).  
The maximum AFC pull-in range is automatically set based on  
the programmed IF filter bandwidth (IFBW in the RADIO_  
CFG_9 register (Address 0x115).  
Table 39. Maximum AFC Pull-In Range  
IF Bandwidth  
Max AFC Pull-In Range  
100 kHz  
50 kHz  
To lock AFC on detection of the qualified sync word, set  
AFC_LOCK_MODE = 3 and ensure that preamble detection is  
disabled in the PREAMBLE_MATCH register (Address 0x11B).  
If this mode is selected, consideration must be given to the  
selection of the sync word. The sync word should be dc free and  
have short run lengths yet low correlation with the preamble  
sequence. See the sync word description in the Packet Mode  
section for further details. After lock on detection of the qualified  
sync word, the AFC lock is maintained for the duration of the  
packet. In sport mode, the AFC lock is released on transitioning  
back to the PHY_ON state or when CMD_ PHY_RX is issued  
while in the PHY_RX state.  
150 kHz  
200 kHz  
300 kHz  
75 kHz  
100 kHz  
150 kHz  
AFC and Preamble Length  
The AFC requires a certain number of the received preamble  
bits to correct the frequency error between the transmitter and  
the receiver. The number of preamble bits required depends on  
the data rate and whether the AFC is locked on detection of the  
qualified preamble or locked on detection of the qualified sync  
word. This is discussed in more detail in the Recommended  
Receiver Settings for 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK section.  
Rev. C | Page 79 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Using 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK modulation, it is also possible  
to tolerate uncoded payload data fields and payload data fields  
with long run length coding constraints if the data rate tolerance  
and packet length are both constrained. More details of CDR  
operation using uncoded packet formats are discussed in the  
AN-915 Application Note.  
AFC Readback  
The frequency error between the received carrier and the  
receiver local oscillator can be measured when AFC is enabled.  
The error value can be read from the FREQUENCY_ERROR_  
READBACK register (Address 0x372), where each LSB equates  
to 1 kHz. The value is a twos complement number. The  
FREQUENCY_ERROR_READBACK value is valid in the  
PHY_RX state after the AFC has been locked. The value is  
retained in the FREQUENCY_ERROR_READBACK register  
after recovering a packet and transitioning back to the  
PHY_ON state.  
The ADF7023s CDR PLL is optimized for fast acquisition of the  
recovered symbols during preamble and typically achieves bit  
synchronization within five symbol transitions of preamble.  
OOK DEMODULATION  
The ADF7023 can be configured for OOK demodulation by  
setting DEMOD_SCHEME = 2 in the RADIO_CFG_9 register  
(Address 0x115). Manchester encoding should be used with  
OOK modulation to ensure optimum performance. OOK  
demodulation is performed using the receiver’s RSSI signal in  
conjunction with a fully automatic threshold detection circuit,  
which extracts the optimum OOK threshold during preamble  
and maintains robust packet error performance over the full  
input power range. The bandwidth of the threshold detection  
circuit is set by the AFC_KI and AFC_KP parameters in the  
RADIO_CFG_11 register (Address 0x117). The AGC loop band-  
width can be independently optimized for acquisition and tracking  
modes during OOK reception by setting OOK_AGC_CLK_ACQ  
and OOK_AGC_CLK_TRK (Address 0x35B), respectively.  
This demodulation scheme delivers high receiver saturation  
performance in OOK mode. The receiver also supports OOK  
modulation depths of up to 20 dB.  
Post-Demodulator Filter  
A second-order, digital low-pass filter removes excess noise from  
the demodulated bit stream at the output of the discriminator.  
The bandwidth of this post-demodulator filter is programmable  
and must be optimized for the users data rate and received  
modulation type. If the bandwidth is set too narrow, performance  
degrades due to intersymbol interference (ISI). If the bandwidth  
is set too wide, excess noise degrades the performance of the  
receiver. For optimum performance, the post-demodulator filter  
bandwidth should be set close to 0.75 times the data rate (when  
using FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK modulation). The actual  
bandwidth of the post-demodulator filter is given by  
Post-Demodulator Filter Bandwidth (kHz) =  
POST_DEMOD_BW × 2  
where POST_DEMOD_BW is set in the RADIO_CFG_4  
register (Address 0x110).  
For optimum performance, the AGC and threshold detection  
circuit should be set to lock after preamble detection by setting  
AGC_LOCK_MODE = 3 in the RADIO_CFG_7 register  
(Address 0x113) and AFC_LOCK_MODE = 3 in the RADIO_  
CFG_10 register (Address 0x116).  
CLOCK RECOVERY  
An oversampled digital clock and data recovery (CDR) PLL is  
used to resynchronize the received bit stream to a local clock in  
all modulation modes. The maximum symbol rate tolerance of  
the CDR PLL is determined by the number of bit transitions in  
the transmitted bit stream. For example, during reception of a  
010101 preamble, the CDR achieves a maximum data rate  
tolerance of 3.0%. However, this tolerance is reduced during  
recovery of the remainder of the packet where symbol transitions  
may not be guaranteed to occur at regular intervals during the  
payload data. To maximize data rate tolerance of the receivers  
CDR, 8b/10b encoding or Manchester encoding should be  
enabled, which guarantees a maximum number of contiguous  
bits in the transmitted bit stream. Data whitening can also be  
enabled on the ADF7023 to break up long sequences of  
contiguous data bit patterns.  
The recommended post-demodulator filter bandwidth is 1.6 times  
the chip rate when using OOK demodulation. This can be  
configured via the POST_DEMOD_BW setting in the  
RADIO_CFG_4 register (Address 0x110).  
Rev. C | Page 80 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 40. Example Static Register Fix for AGC Settings  
BBRAM Register Data Description  
0x128 (STATIC_REG_FIX) 0x2B  
RECOMMENDED RECEIVER SETTINGS FOR  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Pointer to BBRAM  
Address 0x12B  
To optimize the ADF7023 receiver performance and to ensure  
the lowest possible packet error rate, it is recommended to use  
the following configurations:  
0x12B  
0x12C  
0x5E  
0x46  
MCR Address 0x35E  
Data to write to MCR  
Address 0x35E (sets AGC  
low threshold)  
Set the recommended AGC low and high thresholds and  
the AGC clock divide.  
0x12D  
0x12E  
0x5F  
0x78  
MCR Address 0x35F  
Set the recommended AFC Ki and Kp parameters.  
Use a preamble length ≥ the minimum recommended  
preamble length.  
Data to write to MCR  
Address 0x35F (sets AGC  
high threshold)  
When the AGC is configured to lock on the sync word at  
data rates greater than 200 kbps, it is recommended to set  
the sync word error tolerance to one bit.  
0x12F  
0x130  
0x2F  
0x0F  
MCR Address 0x32F  
Data to write to MCR  
Address 0x32F (sets AGC  
clock divide)  
The recommended settings for AGC, AFC, preamble length,  
and sync word are summarized in Table 41.  
0x131  
0x00  
Ends static MCR register  
fixes  
Recommended AGC Settings  
Recommended AFC Settings  
To optimize the receiver for robust packet error rate performance,  
when using minimum preamble length over the full input power  
range, it is recommended to overwrite the default AGC settings  
in the MCR memory. The recommended settings are as follows:  
The bandwidth of the AFC loop is controlled by the AFC_KI  
and AFC_KP parameters in the RADIO_CFG_11 register  
(Address 0x117). To ensure optimum AFC accuracy while  
minimizing the AFC settling time (and thus the required preamble  
length), the AFC_KI and AFC_KP parameters should be set as  
outlined in Table 41.  
AGC_HIGH_THRESHOLD (Address 0x35F) = 0x78  
AGC_LOW_THRESHOLD (Address 0x35E) = 0x46  
Recommended Preamble Length  
AGC_CLOCK_DIVIDE (Address 0x32F) = 0x0F or 0x19  
(depends on the data rate; see Table 41)  
When AFC is locked on preamble detection, the minimum  
preamble length is between 40 and 60 bits depending on the  
data rate. When AFC is set to lock on sync word detection, the  
minimum preamble length is between 14 and 32 bits, depending  
on the data rate. When AFC and preamble detection are disabled,  
the minimum preamble length is dependent on the AGC settling  
time and the CDR acquisition time and is between 8 and 24  
bits, depending on the data rate. The required preamble length  
for various data rates and receiver configurations is summarized  
in Table 41.  
MCR memory is not retained in PHY_SLEEP; therefore, to  
allow the use of these optimized AGC settings in low power  
mode applications, a static register fix can be used. An example  
static register fix to write to the AGC settings in MCR memory  
is shown in Table 40.  
Recommended Sync Word Tolerance  
At data rates greater than 200 kbps and when the AGC is  
configured to lock on the sync word, it is recommended to set the  
sync word error tolerance to one bit (SYNC_ERROR_TOL = 1).  
This prevents an AGC gain change during sync word reception  
causing a packet loss by allowing one bit error in the received  
sync word.  
Rev. C | Page 81 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 41. Summary of Recommended AGC, AFC, Preamble Length, and Sync Word Error Tolerance for 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
AGC2  
AFC3  
Sync Word  
Error  
Minimum  
Preamble  
Length  
Data  
Rate  
(kbps)  
Freq  
Low  
Threshold Threshold Divide  
Tolerance  
Deviation IF BW  
(kHz)  
High  
Clock  
(kHz)  
Setup1  
On/Off Ki  
Kp  
3
(Bits)4  
(Bits)5  
300  
75  
300  
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
3
1
3
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x78  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x46  
0x0F  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
0x19  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
7
8
64  
32  
24  
58  
54  
52  
50  
44  
14  
8
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
200  
150  
100  
50  
50  
200  
150  
100  
100  
100  
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
37.5  
25  
12.5  
20  
38.4  
9.6  
1
10  
10  
100  
100  
7
7
3
3
46  
8
40  
8
1 Setup 1: AFC and AGC are configured to lock on preamble detection by setting AFC_LOCK_MODE = 3 and AGC_LOCK_MODE = 3.  
Setup 2: AFC and AGC are configured to lock on sync word detection by setting AFC_LOCK_MODE = 3, AGC_LOCK_MODE = 3, and PREAMBLE_MATCH = 0.  
Setup 3: AFC is disabled and AGC is configured to lock on sync word detection by setting AFC_LOCK_MODE = 1, AGC_LOCK_MODE = 3, and PREAMBLE_MATCH = 0.  
2 The AGC high threshold is configured by writing to the AGC_HIGH_THRESHOLD register (Address 0x35F). The AGC low threshold is configured by writing to the  
AGC_LOW_THRESHOLD register (Address 0x35E). The AGC clock divide is configured by writing to the AGC_CLOCK_DIVIDE register (Address 0x32F).  
3 The AFC is enabled or disabled by writing to the AFC_LOCK_MODE setting in register RADIO_CFG_10 (Address 0x116). The AFC Ki and Kp parameters are configured  
by writing to the AFC_KP and AFC_KI settings in the RADIO_CFG_11 register (Address 0x117).  
4 The transmit preamble length (in bytes) is set by writing to the PREAMBLE_LEN register (Address 0x11D).  
5 The sync word error tolerance (in bits) is set by writing to the SYNC_ERROR_TOL setting in the SYNC_CONTROL register (Address 0x120).  
RECOMMENDED RECEIVER SETTINGS FOR OOK  
To ensure robust OOK reception, the AGC threshold detection, preamble length, and post-demodulator filter bandwidth are recommended to  
be set as detailed in Table 42.  
Table 42. Summary of Recommended Settings for AGC, AFC, and Preamble Length in OOK Demodulation  
AGC1  
Threshold Detection2  
OOK_  
AGC_  
CLK_  
ACQ  
OOK_  
AGC_  
CLK_  
TRK  
Minimum  
Preamble  
LOCK_ Length  
Data  
Rate  
(kbps)  
Chip  
Rate  
(kcps)  
AGC_  
LOCK_  
MODE  
AFC_  
Post-  
Demodulator  
Bandwidth  
IF BW  
(kHz)  
High  
Threshold  
Low  
Threshold  
AFC  
_KI  
AFC  
_KP  
MODE  
(Bits)  
2.4 to  
19.2  
4.8 to  
38.4  
100  
0x69  
0x2D  
3
1
2
6
3
3
64  
1.6 × chip rate  
1 The recommended values for the AGC high threshold (AGC_HIGH_THRESHOLD), OOK_AGC_CLK_ACQ, and OOK_AGC_CLK_TRK are the same as the default values  
and, therefore, do not need to be set by the host processor. The AGC low threshold is configured by writing to the AGC_LOW_THRESHOLD register (Address 0x35E).  
The AGC lock on preamble detection is configured by setting AGC_LOCK_MODE = 3 (in register RADIO_CFG_7, Address 0x113).  
2 The AFC_KI and AFC_KP parameters control the bandwidth of the threshold detection loop in OOK demodulation. They are configured by writing to the  
RADIO_CFG_11 register (Address 0x117). Setting AFC_LOCK_MODE = 3 configures the OOK threshold detection to lock on preamble detection.  
Rev. C | Page 82 of 112  
 
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
PERIPHERAL FEATURES  
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER  
TEST DAC  
The ADF7023 supports an integrated SAR ADC for digitization  
of analog signals that include the analog temperature sensor, the  
analog RSSI level, and an external analog input signal (Pin 30).  
The conversion time is typically 1 μs. The result of the conver-  
sion can be read from the ADC_READBACK_HIGH register  
(Address 0x327), and the ADC_READBACK_LOW register  
(Address 0x328). The ADC readback is an 8-bit value.  
The test DAC allows the output of the post-demodulator filter  
to be viewed externally. It takes the 16-bit filter output and  
converts it to a high frequency, single-bit output using a second  
order Σ-Δ converter. The output can be viewed on the GP0 pin.  
This signal, when filtered appropriately, can be used to  
Monitor the signal at the post-demodulator filter output  
Measure the demodulator output SNR  
Construct an eye diagram of the received bit stream to  
measure the received signal quality  
The signal source for the ADC input is selected via the  
ADC_CONFIG_LOW register (Address 0x359). In the  
PHY_RX state, the source is automatically set to the analog  
RSSI. The ADC is automatically enabled in PHY_RX. In other  
radio states, the host processor must enable the ADC by setting  
POWERDOWN_RX (Address 0x324) = 0x10.  
Implement analog FM demodulation  
To enable the test DAC, the GPIO_CONFIGURE setting  
(Address 0x3FA) should be set to 0xC9. The TEST_DAC_  
GAIN setting (Address 0x3FD) should be set to 0x00. The test  
DAC signal at the GP0 pin can be filtered with a three-stage,  
low-pass RC filter to reconstruct the demodulated signal. For  
more information, see the AN-852 Application Note.  
To perform an ADC readback, the following procedure should  
be completed:  
1. Read ADC_READBACK_HIGH. This initializes an ADC  
readback.  
2. Read ADC_READBACK_LOW. This returns  
ADC_READBACK[1:0] of the ADC sample.  
3. Read ADC_READBACK_HIGH. This returns  
ADC_READBACK[7:2] of the ADC sample.  
TRANSMIT TEST MODES  
There are two transmit test modes that are enabled by setting  
the VAR_TX_MODE parameter (Address 0x00D in packet  
RAM memory), as described in Table 43. VAR_TX_MODE  
should be set before entering the PHY_TX state.  
TEMPERATURE SENSOR  
Table 43. Transmit Test Modes  
The integrated temperature sensor has an operating range  
between −40°C and +85°C. To enable readback of the  
temperature sensor in PHY_OFF, PHY_ON, or PHY_TX, the  
following registers must be set:  
VAR_TX_MODE  
Mode  
0
1
2
3
Default; no transmit test mode  
Transmit random data continuously  
Transmit the preamble continuously  
Transmit the carrier continuously  
Reserved  
1. Set POWERDOWN_RX (Address 0x324) = 0x10 = 0x10.  
This enables the ADC.  
2. Set POWERDOWN_AUX (Address 0x325) = 0x02. This  
enables the temperature sensor.  
3. Set ADC_CONFIG_LOW (Address 0x359) = 0x08. This  
sets the ADC input to the temperature sensor.  
4 to 255  
SILICON REVISION READBACK  
The product code and silicon revision code can be read from  
the packet RAM memory as described in Table 44. The values  
of the product code and silicon revision code are valid only on  
power-up or wake-up from the PHY_SLEEP state because the  
communications processor overwrites these values on  
transitioning from the PHY_ON state.  
The temperature is determined from the ADC readback value  
using the following formula:  
Temperature (°C) = 0.9474 × (ADC_READBACK[7:0] –  
Calibration Value[7:0]) + TCALIBRATION  
Table 44. Product Code and Silicon Revision Code  
The Calibration Value[7:0] is determined via an ADC readback  
at a single known temperature, TCALIBRATION. When this correction is  
applied, the temperature sensor is accurate to +7°C to −4°C over  
the full operating temperature range.  
Packet Ram  
Location  
Description  
0x001  
0x002  
0x003  
0x004  
Product code, most significant byte = 0x70  
Product code, least significant byte = 0x23  
Silicon revision code, most significant byte  
Silicon revision code least significant byte  
Rev. C | Page 83 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
APPLICATIONS INFORMATION  
This example circuit uses a combined single-ended PA and LNA  
match. Further details on matching topologies and different  
host processor interfaces are given in the following sections.  
APPLICATION CIRCUIT  
A typical application circuit for the ADF7023 is shown in  
Figure 110. All external components required for operation of  
the device, excluding supply decoupling capacitors, are shown.  
32kHz XTAL (OPTIONAL)  
V
DD  
PA/LNA  
MATCH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
CS  
MOSI  
SCLK  
MISO  
IRQ_GP3  
GP2  
CREGRF1  
RBIAS  
GPIO  
MOSI  
SCLK  
MISO  
CREGRF2  
RFIO_1P  
RFIO_1N  
RFO2  
HARMONIC  
FILTER  
ANTENNA  
CONNECTION  
ADF7023  
IRQ  
GND PAD  
GP1  
VDD  
VDDBAT2  
NC  
GP0  
26MHz XTAL  
Figure 110. Typical ADF7023 Application Circuit Diagram  
Rev. C | Page 84 of 112  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
The LNA and PA paths are combined, and a T-stage harmonic  
filter provides attenuation of the transmit harmonics. In a  
combined match, the off impedances of the PA and LNA must  
be considered. This can lead to a small loss in transmit power  
and degradation in receiver sensitivity in comparison with a  
separate single-ended PA and LNA match. However, with  
optimum matching, the typical loss in transmit power is <1dB,  
and the degradation in sensitivity is < 1dB when compared with  
a separate PA and LNA matching topology.  
HOST PROCESSOR INTERFACE  
The interface, when using packet mode, between the ADF7023  
and the host processor is shown in Figure 111. In packet mode,  
all communication between the host processor and the  
ADF7023 occurs on the SPI interface and the IRQ_GP3 pin.  
The interface between the ADF7023 and the host processor in  
sport mode is shown in Figure 112. In sport mode, the transmit  
and receive data interface consists of the GP0, GP1, and GP2  
pins and a separate interrupt is available on GP4, while the SPI  
interface is used for memory access and issuing of commands.  
25  
ADF7023  
V
GP4  
DD  
MATCH  
ADF7023  
3
24  
23  
22  
CREGRF2  
CS  
MOSI  
SCLK  
MISO  
HARMONIC  
FILTER  
GPIO  
MOSI  
SCLK  
MISO  
ANTENNA  
CONNECTION  
4
5
6
RFIO_1P  
RFIO_1N  
RFO2  
21  
20  
IRQ_GP3  
GP2  
IRQ  
19  
18  
GP1  
17  
Figure 113. Combined Single-Ended PA and LNA Match  
GP0  
Separate Single-Ended PA/LNA Match  
The separate single-ended PA and LNA matching configuration  
is illustrated in Figure 114. The network is the same as the  
combined matching network shown in Figure 113 except that  
the transmit and receive paths are separate. An external  
transmit/receive antenna switch can be used to combine the  
transmit and receive paths to allow connection to an antenna.  
In designing this matching network, it is not necessary to  
consider the off impedances of the PA and LNA, and, thus,  
achieving an optimum match is less complex than with the  
combined single-ended PA and LNA match.  
Figure 111. Processor Interface in Packet Mode  
25  
V
DD  
GP4  
IRQ  
24  
23  
22  
ADF7023  
CS  
MOSI  
SCLK  
MISO  
GPIO  
MOSI  
SCLK  
MISO  
21  
20  
IRQ_GP3  
GP2  
IRQ  
19  
18  
GP1  
TxRxCLK  
TxDATA  
RxDATA  
17  
GP0  
LNA MATCH  
ADF7023  
3
CREGRF2  
4
RX  
RFIO_1P  
Figure 112. Processor Interface in Sport Mode  
5
RFIO_1N  
PA/LNA MATCHING  
The AD7023 has a differential LNA and both a single-ended PA  
and differential PA. This flexibility allows numerous possibil-  
ities in interfacing the ADF7023 to the antenna.  
TX  
HARMONIC FILTER  
6
RFO2  
PA MATCH  
Combined Single-Ended PA and LNA Match  
Figure 114. Separate Single-Ended PA and LNA Match  
The combined single-ended PA and LNA match allows the  
transmit and receive paths to be combined without the use of an  
external transmit/receive switch. The matching network design  
is shown in Figure 113. The differential LNA match is a five-  
element discrete balun giving a single-ended input. The single-  
ended PA output is a three-element match consisting of the  
choke inductor to the CREGRF2 regulated supply and an  
inductor and capacitor series.  
Rev. C | Page 85 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Combined Differential PA/LNA Match  
Support for External PA and LNA Control  
In this matching topology, the single-ended PA is not used. The  
differential PA and LNA match comprises a five-element  
discrete balun giving a single-ended input/output as illustrated  
in Figure 115. The harmonic filter is used to minimize the RF  
harmonics from the differential PA.  
The ADF7023 provides independent control signals for an  
external PA or LNA. If the EXT_PA_EN bit is set to 1 in the  
MODE_CONTROL register (Address 0x11A), the external PA  
control signal is logic high while the ADF7023 is in the  
PHY_TX state and logic low while in any other state. If the  
EXT_LNA_EN bit is set to 1 in the MODE_CONTROL register  
(Address 0x11A), the external LNA control signal is logic high  
while the ADF7023 is in the PHY_RX state and logic low while  
in any other state.  
ADF7023  
3
CREGRF2  
RFIO_1P  
RFIO_1N  
ANTENNA  
CONNECTION  
4
5
HARMONIC FILTER  
The external PA and LNA control signals can be configured  
using the EXT_PA_LNA_ATB_CONFIG setting (Address 0x139,  
Bit[7]) as described in Table 45.  
6
RFO2  
Table 45. Configuration of the External PA and LNA Control  
Signals  
Figure 115. Combined Differential PA and LNA Match  
Transmit Antenna Diversity  
EXT_PA_LNA_  
ATB_CONFIG  
Transmit antenna diversity is possible using the differential PA  
and single-ended PA. The required matching network is shown  
in Figure 116.  
Configuration  
1
ADCIN_ATB3 and ATB4 used for control of  
external PA and external LNA, respectively  
(1.8 V logic outputs).  
DIFFERENTIAL PA AND  
LNA MATCH  
0
ADF7023  
XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1 and XOSC32KN_ATB2  
used for control of external PA and external  
LNA, respectively (VDD logic outputs).  
TX  
3
4
5
CREGRF2  
RFIO_1P  
RFIO_1N  
(DIFFERENTIAL  
PA) AND RX  
HARMONIC  
FILTER  
TX  
(SINGLE-  
ENDED PA)  
HARMONIC  
FILTER  
6
RFO2  
SINGLE-ENDED  
PA MATCH  
Figure 116. Matching Topology for Transmit Antenna Diversity  
Rev. C | Page 86 of 112  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
COMMAND REFERENCE  
Table 46. Radio Controller Commands  
Command  
Code Description  
CMD_SYNC  
CMD_PHY_OFF  
CMD_PHY_ON  
CMD_PHY_RX  
CMD_PHY_TX  
CMD_PHY_SLEEP  
CMD_CONFIG_DEV  
CMD_GET_RSSI  
CMD_BB_CAL  
CMD_HW_RESET  
CMD_RAM_LOAD_INIT  
CMD_RAM_LOAD_DONE  
0xA2  
0xB0  
0xB1  
0xB2  
0xB5  
0xBA  
0xBB  
0xBC  
0xBE  
0xC8  
0xBF  
0xC7  
This is an optional command. It is not necessary to use it during device initialization  
Performs a transition of the device into the PHY_OFF state.  
Performs a transition of the device into the PHY_ON state.  
Performs a transition of the device into the PHY_RX state.  
Performs a transition of the device into the PHY_TX state.  
Performs a transition of the device into the PHY_SLEEP state.  
Configures the radio parameters based on the BBRAM values.  
Performs an RSSI measurement.  
Performs a calibration of the IF filter.  
Performs a full hardware reset. The device enters the PHY_SLEEP state.  
Prepares the program RAM for a firmware module download.  
Performs a reset of the communications processor after download of a firmware module to  
program RAM.  
Initiates an image rejection calibration routine.  
Performs an AES encryption on the transmit payload data stored in packet RAM.  
Performs an AES decryption on the received payload data stored in packet RAM.  
Initializes the internal variables required for AES decryption.  
Initializes the internal variables required for the Reed Solomon encoding.  
Calculates and appends the Reed Solomon check bytes to the transmit payload data stored in  
packet RAM.  
CMD_IR_CAL1  
0xBD  
0xD0  
0xD2  
0xD1  
0xD1  
0xD0  
CMD_AES_ENCRYPT2  
CMD_AES_DECRYPT2  
CMD_AES_DECRYPT_INIT  
CMD_RS_ENCODE_INIT3  
CMD_RS_ENCODE3  
CMD_RS_DECODE3  
0xD2  
Performs a Reed Solomon error correction on the received payload data stored in packet RAM.  
1 The image rejection calibration firmware module must be loaded to program RAM for this command to be functional.  
2 The AES firmware module must be loaded to program RAM for this command to be functional.  
3 The Reed Solomon Coding firmware module must be loaded to program RAM for this command to be functional.  
Table 47. SPI Commands  
Command  
Code  
Description  
SPI_MEM_WR  
00011xxxb =  
0x18 (packet RAM)  
0x19 (BBRAM)  
0x1B (MCR)  
0x1E (program RAM)  
Writes data to BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM memory sequentially. An 11-bit address  
is used to identify memory locations. The most significant three bits of the address  
are incorporated into the command (xxxb). This command is followed by the  
remaining eight bits of the address, which are subsequently followed by the data  
bytes to be written.  
SPI_MEM_RD  
00111xxxb =  
Reads data from BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM memory sequentially. An 11-bit  
address is used to identify memory locations. The most significant three bits of the  
address are incorporated into the command (xxxb). This command is followed by  
the remaining eight bits of the address, which are subsequently followed by the  
appropriate number of SPI_NOP commands.  
0x38 (packet RAM)  
0x39 (BBRAM)  
0x3B (MCR)  
SPI_MEMR_WR  
SPI_MEMR_RD  
SPI_NOP  
00001xxxb =  
Writes data to BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM memory nonsequentially.  
0x08 (packet RAM)  
0x09 (BBRAM)  
0x0B (MCR)  
00101xxxb =  
Reads data from BBRAM, MCR, or packet RAM memory nonsequentially.  
0x28 (packet RAM)  
0x29 (BBRAM)  
0x2B (MCR)  
0xFF  
No operation. Use for dummy writes when polling the status word; used also as  
dummy data when performing a memory read.  
Rev. C | Page 87 of 112  
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
REGISTER MAPS  
Table 48. Battery Backup Memory (BBRAM)  
Address (Hex)  
0x100  
0x101  
0x102  
0x103  
0x104  
0x105  
0x106  
0x107  
0x108  
0x109  
0x10A  
0x10B  
0x10C  
0x10D  
0x10E  
Register  
Retained in PHY_SLEEP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Group  
INTERRUPT_MASK_0  
INTERRUPT_MASK_1  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_0  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_1  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD_0 Yes  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD_1 Yes  
RX_DWELL_TIME  
PARMTIME_DIVIDER  
SWM_RSSI_THRESH  
CHANNEL_FREQ_0  
CHANNEL_FREQ_1  
CHANNEL_FREQ_2  
RADIO_CFG_0  
RADIO_CFG_1  
RADIO_CFG_2  
RADIO_CFG_3  
RADIO_CFG_4  
RADIO_CFG_5  
RADIO_CFG_6  
RADIO_CFG_7  
RADIO_CFG_8  
RADIO_CFG_9  
RADIO_CFG_10  
RADIO_CFG_11  
IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_PHASE  
IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_AMPLITUDE  
MODE_CONTROL  
PREAMBLE_MATCH  
SYMBOL_MODE  
PREAMBLE_LEN  
CRC_POLY_0  
CRC_POLY_1  
SYNC_CONTROL  
SYNC_BYTE_0  
SYNC_BYTE_1  
SYNC_BYTE_2  
TX_BASE_ADR  
RX_BASE_ADR  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
MAC  
MAC  
MAC  
MAC  
MAC  
MAC  
MAC  
MAC  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
PHY  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Not applicable  
Yes  
Yes  
0x10F  
0x110  
0x111  
0x112  
0x113  
0x114  
0x115  
0x116  
0x117  
0x118  
0x119  
0x11A  
0x11B  
0x11C  
0x11D  
0x11E  
PHY  
PHY  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
Packet  
PHY  
Packet  
Packet  
PHY  
MAC  
PHY  
Not applicable  
PHY  
PHY  
0x11F  
0x120  
0x121  
0x122  
0x123  
0x124  
0x125  
0x126  
0x127  
0x128  
0x129  
0x12A to 0x137  
0x138  
0x139  
0x13A  
0x13B to 0x13D  
0x13E  
PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL  
PACKET_LENGTH_MAX  
STATIC_REG_FIX  
ADDRESS_MATCH_OFFSET  
Address filtering  
RSSI_WAIT_TIME  
TESTMODES  
TRANSITION_CLOCK_DIV  
Reserved; set to 0x00  
RX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME  
TX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME  
0x13F  
Rev. C | Page 88 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 49. Modem Configuration Memory (MCR)  
Address (Hex)  
0x307  
0x30C  
0x30D  
0x30E  
0x30F  
0x310  
0x311  
0x312  
0x315  
0x319  
0x322  
0x324  
0x325  
0x327  
0x328  
0x32D  
0x32E  
0x32F  
0x336  
0x337  
0x338  
0x339  
0x345  
0x346  
0x34F  
0x350  
0x359  
0x35A  
0x35B  
0x35C  
0x35D  
0x35E  
0x35F  
0x360  
0x361  
0x372  
0x3CB  
0x3CC  
0x3CD  
0x3D0  
0x3D2  
0x3DA  
0x3DB  
0x3F8  
0x3F9  
0x3FA  
0x3FD  
Register  
Retained in PHY_SLEEP  
R/W  
PA_LEVEL_MCR  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
R/W  
W
W
W
W
R/W  
R
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
WUC_CONFIG_HIGH  
WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
WUC_VALUE_HIGH  
WUC_VALUE_LOW  
WUC_FLAG_RESET  
WUC_STATUS  
RSSI_READBACK  
MAX_AFC_RANGE  
IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_CONFIG  
CHIP_SHUTDOWN  
POWERDOWN_RX  
POWERDOWN_AUX  
ADC_READBACK_HIGH  
ADC_READBACK_LOW  
BATTERY_MONITOR_THRESHOLD_VOLTAGE  
EXT_UC_CLK_DIVIDE  
AGC_CLK_DIVIDE  
INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0  
INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1  
CALIBRATION_CONTROL  
CALIBRATION_STATUS  
RXBB_CAL_CALWRD_READBACK  
RXBB_CAL_CALWRD_OVERWRITE  
RCOSC_CAL_READBACK_HIGH  
RCOSC_CAL_READBACK_LOW  
ADC_CONFIG_LOW  
ADC_CONFIG_HIGH  
AGC_OOK_CONTROL  
AGC_CONFIG  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
R
RW  
R
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
AGC_MODE  
AGC_LOW_THRESHOLD  
AGC_HIGH_THRESHOLD  
AGC_GAIN_STATUS  
AGC_ADC_WORD  
R
R
FREQUENCY_ERROR_READBACK  
VCO_BAND_OVRW_VAL  
VCO_AMPL_OVRW_VAL  
VCO_OVRW_EN  
VCO_CAL_CFG  
OSC_CONFIG  
VCO_BAND_READBACK  
VCO_AMPL_READBACK  
ANALOG_TEST_BUS  
RSSI_TSTMUX_SEL  
GPIO_CONFIGURE  
TEST_DAC_GAIN  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Rev. C | Page 89 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 50. Packet RAM Memory  
Address  
Register  
R/W  
R/W  
R
R
R
R
R
R/W  
R
0x000  
VAR_COMMAND  
0x0011  
Product code, most significant byte = 0x70  
Product code, least significant byte = 0x23  
Silicon revision code, most significant byte  
Silicon revision code, least significant byte  
Reserved  
0x0021  
0x0031  
0x0041  
0x005 to 0x00B  
0x00D  
0x00E to 0x00F  
VAR_TX_MODE  
Reserved  
1 Only valid on power-up or wake-up from the PHY_SLEEP state because the communications processor overwrites these values on exit from the PHY_ON state.  
BBRAM REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Table 51. 0x100: INTERRUPT_MASK_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7]  
INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS  
R/W  
Interrupt when the number of WUC wake-ups (NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:0])  
has reached the threshold (NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD[15:0])  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
[6]  
[5]  
INTERRUPT_SWM_RSSI_DET  
INTERRUPT_AES_DONE  
R/W  
R/W  
Interrupt when the measured RSSI during smart wake mode has exceeded the  
RSSI threshold value (SWM_RSSI_THRESH, Address 0x108)  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Interrupt when an AES encryption or decryption command is complete; available  
only when the AES firmware module has been loaded to the ADF7023 program  
RAM  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
[4]  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
[0]  
INTERRUPT_TX_EOF  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Interrupt when a packet has finished transmitting  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
INTERRUPT_ADDRESS_MATCH  
INTERRUPT_CRC_CORRECT  
INTERRUPT_SYNC_DETECT  
INTERRUPT_PREMABLE_DETECT  
Interrupt when a received packet has a valid address match  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Interrupt when a received packet has the correct CRC  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Interrupt when a qualified sync word has been detected in the received packet  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Interrupt when a qualified preamble has been detected in the received packet  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Table 52. 0x101: INTERRUPT_MASK_1  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7]  
BATTERY_ALARM  
R/W  
Interrupt when the battery voltage has dropped below the threshold value  
(BATTERY_MONITOR_THRESHOLD_VOLTAGE, Address 0x32D)  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
[6]  
CMD_READY  
R/W  
Interrupt when the communications processor is ready to load a new command;  
mirrors the CMD_READY bit of the status word  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
[5]  
[4]  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
WUC_TIMEOUT  
Interrupt when the WUC has timed out  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
SPI_READY  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Interrupt when the SPI is ready for access  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
[0]  
CMD_FINISHED  
R/W  
Interrupt when the communications processor has finished performing a  
command  
1: interrupt enabled; 0: interrupt disabled  
Rev. C | Page 90 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 53. 0x102: NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0]  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[7:0]  
R/W Bits[7:0] of [15:0] of an internal 16-bit count of the number of wake-ups  
(WUC timeouts) the device has gone through. It can be initialized to  
0x0000.  
Table 54. 0x103: NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_1  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0]  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:8]  
R/W Bits[15:8] of [15:0] of an internal 16-bit count of the number of WUC wake-  
ups the device has gone through. It can be initialized to 0x0000.  
Table 55. 0x104: NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0] NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD[7:0]  
R/W Bits[7:0] of [15:0] (see Table 56). The threshold for the number of wake-ups  
(WUC timeouts). It is a 16-bit count threshold that is compared against the  
NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS parameter. When this threshold is exceeded, the  
device wakes up in the PHY_OFF state and optionally generates  
INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS.  
Table 56. 0x105: NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD_1  
Bit Name R/W Description  
[7:0] NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD[15:8] R/W Bits[15:8] of [15:0] (see Table 55).  
Table 57. 0x106: RX_DWELL_TIME  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0] RX_DWELL_TIME  
R/W When the WUC is used and SWM is enabled, the radio powers up and  
enables the receiver on the channel defined in the BBRAM and listens for  
this period of time. If no preamble pattern is detected in this period, the  
device goes back to sleep.  
Receive Dwell Time (s) = RX_DWELL_TIME ×  
6.5 MHz  
128 × PARMTIME_DIVIDER  
Table 58. 0x107: PARMTIME_DIVIDER  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0] PARMTIME_DIVIDER  
R/W Units of time used to define the RX_DWELL_TIME time period.  
128 × PARMTIME_DIVIDER  
Timer Tick Rate =  
6.5 MHz  
A value of 0x33 gives a clock of 995.7 Hz or a period of 1.004 ms.  
Table 59. 0x108: SWM_RSSI_THRESH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0] SWM_RSSI_THRESH  
R/W This sets the RSSI threshold when in smart wake mode with RSSI detection  
enabled.  
Threshold (dBm) = SWM_RSSI_THRESH − 107  
Table 60. 0x109: CHANNEL_FREQ_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0] CHANNEL_FREQ[7:0]  
R/W The RF channel frequency in hertz is set according to  
(CHANNEL_FREQ[23 : 0])  
Frequency (Hz) = F  
PFD  
×
216  
where FPFD is the PFD frequency and is equal to 26 MHz.  
Rev. C | Page 91 of 112  
 
 
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 61. 0x10A: CHANNEL_FREQ_1  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
CHANNEL_FREQ[15:8]  
R/W  
See the CHANNEL_FREQ_0 description in Table 60.  
Table 62. 0x10B: CHANNEL_FREQ_2  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
CHANNEL_FREQ[23:16]  
R/W  
See the CHANNEL_FREQ_0 description in Table 60.  
Table 63. 0x10C: RADIO_CFG_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
DATA_RATE[7:0]  
R/W  
The data rate in bps is set according to  
Data Rate (bps) = DATA_RATE[11:0] × 100  
Table 64. 0x10D: RADIO_CFG_1  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Description  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
FREQ_DEVIATION[11:8]  
DATA_RATE[11:8]  
See the FREQ_DEVIATION description in RADIO_CFG_2 (Table 65).  
See the DATA_RATE description in RADIO_CFG_0 (Table 63).  
Table 65. 0x10E: RADIO_CFG_2  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
FREQ_DEVIATION[7:0]  
R/W  
The binary level 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK frequency deviation in hertz (defined  
as the frequency difference between carrier frequency and 1/0 tones) is set  
according to  
Frequency Deviation (Hz) = FREQ_DEVIATION[11 : 0] ×100  
Table 66. 0x10F: RADIO_CFG_3  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
DISCRIM_BW[7:0]  
R/W  
The DISCRIM_BW value sets the bandwidth of the correlator demodulator. See  
the 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK Demodulation section for the steps required to set  
the DISCRIM_BW value.  
Table 67. 0x110: RADIO_CFG_4  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
POST_DEMOD_BW[7:0]  
R/W  
For optimum performance, the post-demodulator filter bandwidth should be  
set close to 0.75 times the data rate. The actual bandwidth of the post-demod-  
ulator filter is given by  
Post-Demodulator Filter Bandwidth (kHz) = POST_DEMOD_BW × 2  
The range of POST_DEMOD_BW is 1 to 255.  
Table 68. 0x111: RADIO_CFG_5  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
Reserved  
R/W  
Set to zero.  
Table 69. 0x112: RADIO_CFG_6  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:2]  
SYNTH_LUT_CONFIG_0  
R/W  
If SYNTH_LUT_CONTROL (Address 0x113, Table 70) = 0 or 2, set  
SYNTH_LUT_CONFIG_0 = 0. If SYNTH_LUT_CONTROL = 1 or 3, this setting  
allows the receiver PLL loop bandwidth to be changed to optimize the receiver  
local oscillator phase noise.  
[1:0]  
DISCRIM_PHASE[1:0]  
R/W  
The DISCRIM_PHASE value sets the phase of the correlator demodulator. See  
the 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK Demodulation section for the steps required to set  
the DISCRIM_PHASE value.  
Rev. C | Page 92 of 112  
 
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 70. 0x113: RADIO_CFG_7  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
Set to  
[7:6]  
AGC_LOCK_MODE  
R/W  
0: free running  
1: manual  
2: hold  
3: lock after preamble/sync word (only locks on a sync word if PREAMBLE_  
MATCH = 0)  
[5:4]  
SYNTH_LUT_CONTROL  
R/W  
By default, the synthesizer loop bandwidth is automatically selected from  
lookup tables (LUT) in ROM memory. A narrow bandwidth is selected in  
receive to ensure optimum interference rejection, whereas in transmit, the  
bandwidth is selected based on the data rate and modulation settings. For  
the majority of applications, these automatically selected PLL loop  
bandwidths are optimum. However, in some applications, it may be  
necessary to use custom transmit or receive bandwidths, in which case,  
various options exist, as follows.  
SYNTH_LUT_CONTROL  
Description  
0
Use predefined transmit and  
receive LUTs. The LUTs are  
automatically selected from ROM  
memory on transitioning into the  
PHY_TX or PHY_RX state.  
1
2
Use custom receive LUT based on  
SYNTH_ LUT_CONFIG_0 and  
SYNTH_LUT_CONFIG_1. In transmit,  
the predefined LUT in ROM is used.  
Use a custom transmit LUT. The  
custom transmit LUT must be  
written to the 0x10 to 0x18 packet  
RAM locations. In receive, the  
predefined LUT in ROM is used.  
3
Use a custom receive LUT based on  
SYNTH_ LUT_CONFIG_0 and  
SYNTH_LUT_CONFIG_1, and use a  
custom transmit LUT. The custom  
transmit LUT must be written to the  
0x10 to 0x18 packet RAM locations  
Because packet RAM memory is lost in the PHY_SLEEP state, the custom  
LUT for transmit must be reloaded to packet RAM after waking from the  
PHY_SLEEP state.  
[3:0]  
SYNTH_LUT_CONFIG_1  
R/W  
If SYNTH_LUT_CONTROL = 0 or 2, set SYNTH_LUT_CONFIG_1 to 0. If  
SYNTH_LUT_CONTROL = 1 or 3, this setting allows the receiver PLL loop  
bandwidth to be changed to optimize the receiver local oscillator phase  
noise.  
Rev. C | Page 93 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 71. 0x114: RADIO_CFG_8  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7]  
PA_SINGLE_DIFF_SEL  
R/W  
PA_SINGLE_DIFF_SEL  
PA  
0
1
Single-ended PA enabled  
Differential PA enabled  
[6:3]  
PA_LEVEL  
R/W  
Sets the PA output power. A value of zero sets the minimum RF output  
power, and a value of 15 sets the maximum PA output power. The PA level  
can also be set with finer resolution using the PA_LEVEL_MCR setting  
(Address 0x307). The PA_LEVEL setting is related to the PA_LEVEL_MCR  
setting by  
PA_LEVEL_MCR = 4 × PA_LEVEL + 3  
PA_LEVEL  
PA Level (PA_LEVEL_MCR)  
0
1
2
15  
Setting 3  
Setting 7  
Setting 11  
Setting 63  
[2:0]  
PA_RAMP  
R/W  
Sets the PA ramp rate. The PA ramps at the programmed rate until it  
reaches the level indicated by the PA_LEVEL_MCR (Address 0x307) setting.  
The ramp rate is dependent on the programmed data rate.  
PA_RAMP  
Ramp Rate  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved  
256 codes per data bit  
128 codes per data bit  
64 codes per data bit  
32 codes per data bit  
16 codes per data bit  
Eight codes per data bit  
Four codes per data bit  
To ensure the correct PA ramp-up and -down timing, the PA ramp rate has  
a minimum value based on the data rate and the PA_LEVEL or  
PA_LEVEL_MCR settings. This minimum value is described by  
PA_LEVEL_MCR[5 : 0]  
Ramp Rate(Codes/Bit) <10,000 ×  
DATA_RATE[11 : 0]  
where PA_LEVEL_MCR is related to the PA_LEVEL setting by PA_LEVEL_MCR  
= 4 × PA_LEVEL + 3.  
Table 72. 0x115: RADIO_CFG_9  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:6]  
IFBW  
R/W  
Sets the receiver IF filter bandwidth. Note that setting an IF filter bandwidth of 300 kHz automatically  
changes the receiver IF frequency from 200 kHz to 300 kHz.  
IFBW  
IF Bandwidth  
100 kHz  
0
1
150 kHz  
2
200 kHz  
3
300 kHz  
[5:3]  
MOD_SCHEME  
R/W  
Sets the transmitter modulation scheme.  
MOD_SCHEME  
Modulation Scheme  
Two-level 2FSK/MSK  
Two-level GFSK/GSMK  
OOK  
0
1
2
3
Carrier only  
4 to 7  
Reserved  
Rev. C | Page 94 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[2:0]  
DEMOD_SCHEME R/W  
Sets the receiver demodulation scheme.  
DEMOD_SCHEME  
Demodulation Scheme  
2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK  
Reserved  
0
1
2
OOK  
3 to 7  
Reserved  
Table 73. 0x116: RADIO_CFG_10  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Description  
Set to 0.  
[7:5]  
[4]  
Reserved  
AFC_POLARITY  
AFC_SCHEME  
AFC_LOCK_MODE  
Set to 0.  
[3:2]  
[1:0]  
Set to 2.  
Sets the AFC mode.  
AFC_LOCK_MODE Mode  
0
1
2
3
Free running: AFC is free running.  
Disabled: AFC is disabled.  
Hold AFC: AFC is paused.  
Lock: AFC locks after the preamble or sync word  
(only locks on a sync word if PREAMBLE_MATCH = 0).  
Table 74. 0x117: RADIO_CFG_11  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:4]  
AFC_KP  
R/W  
Sets the AFC PI controller proportional gain in 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK; the  
recommended value is 0x3. In OOK demodulation, this setting is used to  
control the OOK threshold loop; the recommended value is 0x3.  
AFC_KP  
Proportional Gain  
0
1
2
20  
21  
22  
15  
215  
[3:0]  
AFC_KI  
R/W  
Sets the AFC PI controller integral gain in 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK; the  
recommended value is 0x7. In OOK modulation, this setting is used to  
control the OOK threshold loop; the recommended value is 0x6.  
AFC_KI  
Integral Gain  
0
1
2
20  
21  
22  
15  
215  
Table 75. 0x118: IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_PHASE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Description  
[7]  
Reserved  
Set to 0  
[6:0]  
IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_PHASE  
Sets the I/Q phase adjustment  
Table 76. 0x119: IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_AMPLITUDE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Description  
[7]  
Set to 0  
Reserved  
IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_AMPLITUDE  
[6:0]  
Sets the I/Q amplitude adjustment  
Rev. C | Page 95 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 77. 0x11A: MODE_CONTROL  
Bit Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7] SWM_EN  
R/W  
1: smart wake mode enabled.  
0: smart wake mode disabled.  
[6] BB_CAL  
R/W  
1: IF filter calibration enabled.  
0: IF filter calibration disabled.  
IF filter calibration is automatically performed on the transition from the PHY_OFF  
state to the PHY_ON state if this bit is set.  
[5] SWM_RSSI_QUAL  
R/W  
R/W  
1: RSSI qualify in low power mode enabled.  
0: RSSI qualify in low power mode disabled.  
[4] TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
If TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND = 1, the device automatically transitions to the  
PHY_RX state at the end of a packet transmission, on the same RF channel  
frequency.  
If TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND = 0, this operation is disabled.  
TX_TO_RX_AUTO_TURNAROUND is only available in packet mode.  
[3] RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND  
R/W  
If RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND = 1, the device automatically transitions to the  
PHY_TX state at the end of a valid packet reception, on the same RF channel  
frequency.  
If RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND = 0, this operation is disabled.  
RX_TO_TX_AUTO_TURNAROUND is only available in packet mode.  
[2] CUSTOM_TRX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME_EN R/W  
1: use the custom synthesizer lock time defined in Register 0x13E and  
Register 0x13F.  
0: default synthesizer lock time.  
[1] EXT_LNA_EN  
[0] EXT_PA_EN  
R/W  
R/W  
1: external LNA enable signal on ATB4 is enabled. The signal is logic high while the  
ADF7023 is in the PHY_RX state and logic low while in any other nonsleep state.  
0: external LNA enable signal on ATB4 is disabled.  
1: external PA enable signal on ATB3 is enabled. The signal is logic high while the  
ADF7023 is in the PHY_TX state and logic low while in any other nonsleep state.  
0: external PA enable signal on ADCIN_ATB3 is disabled.  
Table 78. 0x11B: PREAMBLE_MATCH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Description  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
Reserved  
Set to 0  
PREAMBLE_MATCH  
PREAMBLE_MATCH  
Description  
12  
0 errors allowed.  
11  
10  
9
8
One erroneous bit-pair allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Two erroneous bit-pairs allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Three erroneous bit-pairs allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Four erroneous bit-pairs allowed in 12 bit-pairs.  
Preamble detection disabled.  
Not recommended.  
0
1 to 7  
13 to 15  
Reserved.  
Rev. C | Page 96 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 79. 0x11C: SYMBOL_MODE  
Bit  
[7]  
[6]  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Description  
Reserved  
Set to 0.  
MANCHESTER_ENC  
1: Manchester encoding and decoding enabled.  
0: Manchester encoding and decoding disabled.  
1: programmable CRC selected.  
0: default CRC selected.  
[5]  
PROG_CRC_EN  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
[4]  
EIGHT_TEN_ENC  
DATA_WHITENING  
SYMBOL_LENGTH  
1: 8b/10b encoding and decoding enabled.  
0: 8b/10b encoding and decoding disabled.  
[3]  
1: data whitening and dewhitening enabled.  
0: data whitening and dewhitening disabled.  
[2:0]  
SYMBOL_LENGTH  
Description  
0
1
8-bit (recommended except when 8b/10b is being used).  
10-bit (for 8b/10b encoding).  
Reserved.  
2 to 7  
Table 80. 0x11D: PREAMBLE_LEN  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
PREAMBLE_LEN  
R/W  
Length of preamble in bytes. Example: a value of decimal 3 results in a preamble of  
24 bits.  
Table 81. 0x11E: CRC_POLY_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
CRC_POLY[7:0]  
R/W  
Lower byte of CRC_POLY[15:0], which sets the CRC polynomial.  
Table 82. 0x11F: CRC_POLY_1  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
CRC_POLY[15:8]  
R/W  
Upper byte of CRC_POLY[15:0], which sets the CRC polynomial. See the Packet Mode  
section for more details on how to configure a CRC polynomial.  
Table 83. 0x120: SYNC_CONTROL  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:6]  
SYNC_ERROR_TOL  
R/W  
Sets the sync word error tolerance in bits.  
SYNC_ERROR_TOL  
Bit Error Tolerance  
0 bit errors allowed.  
One bit error allowed.  
Two bit errors allowed.  
Three bit errors allowed.  
0
1
2
3
[5]  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
Set to 0.  
[4:0]  
SYNC_WORD_LENGTH  
Sets the sync word length in bits; 24 bits is the maximum. Note that the sync word  
matching length can be any value up to 24 bits, but the transmitted sync word  
pattern is a multiple of eight bits. Therefore, for non-byte-length sync words, the  
transmitted sync pattern should be filled out with the preamble pattern.  
SYNC_WORD_LENGTH  
Length in Bits  
0
0
1
1
24  
24  
Rev. C | Page 97 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 84. 0x121: SYNC_BYTE_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
SYNC_BYTE[23:16]  
R/W  
Upper byte of the sync word pattern. The sync word pattern is transmitted  
most significant bit first starting with SYNC_BYTE_0. For nonbyte length  
sync words, the reminder of the least significant byte should be stuffed with  
the preamble.  
If SYNC_WORD_LENGTH length is >16 bits, SYNC_BYTE_0, SYNC_BYTE_1,  
and SYNC_BYTE_2 are all transmitted for a total of 24 bits.  
If SYNC_WORD_LENGTH is between 8 and 15, SYNC_BYTE_1 and SYNC_  
BYTE_2 are transmitted.  
If SYNC_WORD_LENGTH is between 1 and 7, SYNC_BYTE_2 is transmitted  
for a total of eight bits.  
If the SYNC WORD LENGTH is 0, no sync bytes are transmitted.  
Table 85. 0x122: SYNC_BYTE_1  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
SYNC_BYTE[15:8]  
R/W  
Middle byte of the sync word pattern.  
Table 86. 0x123: SYNC_BYTE_2  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
SYNC_BYTE[7:0]  
R/W  
Lower byte of the sync word pattern.  
Table 87. 0x124: TX_BASE_ADR  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
TX_BASE_ADR  
R/W  
Address in packet RAM of the transmit packet. This address indicates to the  
communications processor the location of the first byte of the transmit  
packet.  
Table 88. 0x125: RX_BASE_ADR  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
RX_BASE_ADR  
R/W  
Address in packet RAM of the receive packet. The communications  
processor writes any qualified received packet to packet RAM, starting at  
this memory location.  
Table 89. 0x126: PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7]  
DATA_BYTE  
R/W  
Over-the-air arrangement of each transmitted packet RAM byte. A byte is  
transmitted either MSB or LSB first. The same setting should be used on the  
Tx and Rx sides of the link.  
1: data byte MSB first.  
0: data byte LSB first.  
[6]  
PACKET_LEN  
R/W  
1: fixed packet length mode. Fixed packet length in Tx and Rx modes, given  
by PACKET_LENGTH_MAX.  
0: variable packet length mode. In Rx mode, packet length is given by the  
first byte in packet RAM. In Tx mode, the packet length is given by  
PACKET_LENGTH_MAX.  
[5]  
CRC_EN  
R/W  
R/W  
1: append CRC in transmit mode. Check CRC in receive mode.  
0: no CRC addition in transmit mode. No CRC check in receive mode.  
[4:3]  
DATA_MODE  
Sets the ADF7023 to packet mode or sport mode for transmit and receive data.  
DATA_MODE  
Description  
0
1
Packet mode enabled.  
Sport mode enabled. GP4 interrupt enabled on preamble  
detection. Rx data enabled on preamble detection.  
2
3
Sport mode enabled. GP4 interrupt enabled on sync word  
detection. Rx data enabled on preamble detection.  
Unused.  
Rev. C | Page 98 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[2:0]  
LENGTH_OFFSET  
R/W  
Offset value in bytes that is added to the received packet length field value  
(in variable length packet mode) so that the communications processor  
knows the correct number of bytes to read.  
The communications processor calculates the actual received payload  
length as  
Rx Payload Length = Length + LENGTH_OFFSET − 4  
where Length is the length field (the first byte in the received payload).  
Table 90. 0x127: PACKET_LENGTH_MAX  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
PACKET_LENGTH_MAX  
R/W  
If variable packet length mode is used (PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL = 0),  
PACKET_LENGTH_MAX sets the maximum receive packet length in bytes. If  
fixed packet length mode is used (PACKET_LENGTH_CONTROL = 1),  
PACKET_LENGTH_MAX sets the length of the fixed transmit and receive  
packet in bytes. Note that the packet length is defined as the number of  
bytes from the end of the sync word to the start of the CRC. It also does not  
include the LENGTH_OFFSET value.  
Table 91. 0x128: STATIC_REG_FIX  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0]  
STATIC_REG_FIX R/W The ADF7023 has the ability to implement automatic static register fixes from BBRAM memory to MCR memory.  
This feature allows a maximum of nine MCR registers to be programmed via BBRAM memory. This feature  
is useful if MCR registers must be configured for optimum receiver performance in low power mode.  
The STATIC_REG_FIX value is an address pointer to any BBRAM memory address between 0x12A and  
0x13D. For example, to point to BBRAM Address 0x12B, set STATIC_REG_FIX= 0x2B.  
If STATIC_REG_FIX = 0x00, then static register fixes are disabled.  
If STATIC_REG_FIX is nonzero, the communications processor looks for the MCR address and  
corresponding data at the BBRAM address beginning at STATIC_REG_FIX.  
Example: write 0x46 to MCR Register 0x35E and write 0x78 to MCR Register 0x35F. Set STATIC_REG_FIX = 0x2B.  
BBRAM Register  
Data Description  
0x128 (STATIC_REG_FIX)  
0x2B Pointer to BBRAM Address 0x12B  
0x5E MCR Address 1  
0x46 Data to write to MCR Address 1  
0x5F MCR Address 2  
0x78 Data to write to MCR Address 2  
0x00 Ends static MCR register fixes  
0x12B  
0x12C  
0x12D  
0x12E  
0x12F  
Table 92. 0x129: ADDRESS_MATCH_OFFSET  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
Location of first byte of address information in packet RAM  
[7:0]  
ADDRESS_MATCH_OFFSET  
R/W  
Table 93. 0x12A: ADDRESS_LENGTH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
ADDRESS_LENGTH  
R/W  
Number of bytes in the first address field (NADR_1). Set to zero if address filtering is not being used.  
Table 94. 0x12B to 0x137: Address Filtering (or Static Register Fix)  
Address  
0x12B  
0x12C  
0x12D  
0x12E  
Bit  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
Address 1 Match Byte 0.  
Address 1 Mask Byte 0.  
Address 1 Match Byte 1.  
Address 1 Mask Byte 1.  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Address 1 Match Byte NADR_1.  
Address 1 Mask Byte NADR_1  
.
0x00 to end or number of bytes in the second address field (NADR_2  
)
Rev. C | Page 99 of 112  
 
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 95. 0x138: RSSI_WAIT_TIME  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0] RSSI_WAIT_TIME  
R/W  
Settling time in µs before taking an RSSI measurement in SWM or when using CMD_GET_RSSI. A value  
of 0xA7 can be used safely in all situations; however, this can be reduced for particular implementations.  
Table 96. 0x139: TESTMODES  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7]  
EXT_PA_LNA_ATB_CONFIG R/W  
1:ATB3 and ATB4 used for control of extPA and extLNA, respectively (1.8 V logic outputs).  
0:ATB1 and ATB2 used for control of extPA and extLNA, respectively (VDD logic outputs).  
Must also enable external PA/LNA in Register 0x11A.  
[6:4]  
[3]  
Reserved  
R/W Set to 0.  
PER_IRQ_SELF_CLEAR  
R/W 1: Automatic clear of INTERRUPT_TX_EOF and INTERRUPT_CORRECT_CRC.  
0: Normal operation.  
[2]  
[1]  
PER_ENABLE  
R/W 1: Packet error rate enabled.  
0: Packet error rate disabled.  
CONTINUOUS_TX  
R/W  
1: Restart TX after transmitting a packet.  
0: Normal end of TX.  
[0]  
CONTINUOUS_RX  
R/W  
1: Restart RX after transmitting a packet.  
0: Normal end of RX.  
Table 97. 0x13A: TRANSITION_CLOCK_DIV  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Description  
[7:0]  
TRANSITION_CLOCK_DIV  
R/W 0x00: Normal transition times.  
0x01: Fast transition times.  
0x04: Normal transition times.  
Else: Reserved.  
Table 98. 0x13E: RX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0] RX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME R/W  
Allows the use of a custom synthesizer lock time counter in receive mode in conjunction with the  
CUSTOM_TRX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME_EN setting in the MODE_CONTROL register. Applies after VCO  
calibration is complete. Each bit equates to a 2 μs increment.  
Table 99. 0x13F: TX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Description  
[7:0] TX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME R/W  
Allows the use of a custom synthesizer lock time counter in transmit mode in conjunction with  
the CUSTOM_TRX_SYNTH_LOCK_TIME_EN setting in the MODE_CONTROL register. Applies after  
VCO calibration is complete. Each bit equates to a 2 μs increment.  
MCR REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
The MCR register settings are not retained when the device enters the PHY_SLEEP state.  
Table 100. 0x307: PA_LEVEL_MCR  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset  
Description  
[5:0] PA_LEVEL_MCR R/W  
0
Power amplifier level. If PA ramp is enabled, the PA ramps to this target level. The PA level can be  
set in the 0 to 63 range. The PA level (with less resolution) can also be set via the BBRAM;  
therefore, the MCR setting should be used only if more resolution is required.  
Rev. C | Page 100 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 101. 0x30C: WUC_CONFIG_HIGH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset Description  
[7]  
Reserved  
W
W
0
0
Set to 0.  
[6:3] RCOSC_COARSE_CAL_VALUE  
Change in RC Oscillator  
RCOSC_COARSE_CAL_VALUE Frequency  
Coarse Tune State  
State 10  
State 9  
0000  
0001  
+83%  
+66%  
1000  
+50%  
State 8  
1001  
+33%  
State 7  
1100  
+16%  
State 6  
1101  
0%  
State 5  
1110  
−16%  
State 4  
1111  
−33%  
State 3  
0110  
−50%  
State 2  
0111  
−66%  
State 1  
[2:0] WUC_PRESCALER  
W
0
WUC_PRESCALER  
32.768 kHz Divider  
1
4
8
Tick Period  
30.52 μs  
122.1 μs  
244.1 μs  
488.3 μs  
3.91 ms  
31.25 ms  
250 ms  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16  
128  
1024  
8192  
65,536  
2000 ms  
Register WUC_CONFIG_LOW should never be written to without updating Register WUC_CONFIG_HIGH first.  
Table 102. 0x30D: WUC_CONFIG_LOW  
Bit  
[7]  
[6]  
Name  
R/W  
W
Reset  
Description  
Reserved  
0
0
Set to 0.  
WUC_RCOSC_EN  
W
1: enable RCOSC32K.  
0: disable RCOSC32K.  
[5]  
[4]  
WUC_XOSC32K_EN  
WUC_CLKSEL  
W
W
0
0
1: enable XOSC32K.  
0: disable XOSC32K.  
Select the WUC timer clock source.  
1: RC 32.768 kHz oscillator.  
0: external crystal oscillator.  
[3]  
WUC_BBRAM_EN  
W
0
1: enable power to the BBRAM during the PHY_SLEEP state.  
0: disable power to the BBRAM during the PHY_SLEEP state.  
Set to 0.  
[2:1] Reserved  
[0] WUC_ARM  
W
W
0
0
1: enable wake-up on a WUC timeout event.  
0: disable wake-up on a WUC timeout event.  
Updates to Register WUC_VALUE_HIGH become effective only after Register WUC_VALUE_LOW is written to.  
Table 103. 0x30E: WUC_VALUE_HIGH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset Description  
[7:0] WUC_TIMER_VALUE[15:8]  
W
0
WUC timer reload value, Bits[15:8] of [15:0]. A wake-up event is triggered when the  
WUC unit is enabled and the timer has counted down to 0. The timer is clocked with  
the prescaler output rate. An update to this register becomes effective only after  
WUC_VALUE_LOW is written.  
Register WUC_VALUE_LOW should never be written to without updating register WUC_VALUE_HIGH first.  
Table 104. 0x30F: WUC_VALUE_LOW  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset Description  
[7:0] WUC_TIMER_VALUE[7:0]  
W
0
WUC timer reload value, Bits[7:0] of [15:0]. A wake-up event is triggered when the WUC  
unit is enabled and the timer has counted down to 0. The timer is clocked with the  
prescaler output rate.  
Rev. C | Page 101 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 105. 0x310: WUC_FLAG_RESET  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset  
Description  
[1]  
WUC_RCOSC_CAL_EN R/W  
0
1: enable.  
0: disable RCOSC32K calibration.  
[0]  
WUC_FLAG_RESET  
R/W  
1: reset the WUC_TMR_PRIM_TOFLAG and WUC_PORFLAG bits (Address 0x311, Table 106).  
0: normal operation.  
Table 106. 0x311: WUC_STATUS  
Bit  
[7]  
[6]  
Name  
R/W  
R
Reset  
Description  
Reserved  
0
0
Reserved.  
WUC_RCOSC_CAL_ERROR  
R
1: RCOSC32K calibration exited with error  
0: without error (only valid if WUC_RCOSC_CAL_EN = 1).  
1: RCOSC32K calibration finished  
[5]  
[4]  
WUC_RCOSC_CAL_READY  
XOSC32K_RDY  
R
R
0
0
0: in progress (only valid if WUC_RCOSC_CAL_EN = 1).  
1: XOSC32K oscillator has settled  
0: not settled (only valid if WUC_XOSC32K_EN = 1).  
Output signal of the XOSC32K oscillator (instantaneous).  
[3]  
[2]  
XOSC32K_OUT  
WUC_PORFLAG  
R
R
0
0
1: chip cold start event has been registered.  
0: not registered.  
[1]  
[0]  
WUC_TMR_PRIM_TOFLAG  
WUC_TMR_PRIM_TOEVENT  
R
R
0
0
1: WUC timeout event has been registered.  
0: not registered (the output of a latch triggered by a timeout event).  
1: WUC timeout event is present.  
0: not present (this bit is set when the counter reaches 0; it is not latched).  
Table 107. 0x312: RSSI_READBACK  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset Description  
Receive input power. After reception of a packet, the RSSI_READBACK value is valid.  
RSSI (dBm) = RSSI_READBACK – 107  
[7:0] RSSI_READBACK  
R
0
Table 108. 0x315: MAX_AFC_RANGE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0] MAX_AFC_RANGE R/W  
50  
Limits the AFC pull-in range. Automatically set by the communications processor on  
transitioning into the PHY_RX state. The range is set equal to half the IF bandwidth. Example:  
IF bandwidth = 200 kHz, AFC pull-in range = 100 kHz (MAX_AFC_RANGE = 100).  
Table 109. 0x319: IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_CONFIG  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:6]  
[5]  
Reserved  
R/W  
0
0
0
IMAGE_REJECT_CAL_OVWRT_EN R/W  
Overwrite control for image reject calibration results.  
[4:3]  
IMAGE_REJECT_FREQUENCY  
R/W  
Set the fundamental frequency of the IR calibration signal source. A harmonic  
of this frequency can be used as an internal RF signal source for the image  
rejection calibration.  
0: IR calibration source disabled in XTAL divider  
1: IR calibration source fundamental frequency = XTAL/4  
2: IR calibration source fundamental frequency = XTAL/8  
3: IR calibration source fundamental frequency = XTAL/16  
[2:0]  
IMAGE_REJECT_POWER  
R/W  
0
Set power level of IR calibration source.  
0: IR calibration source disabled at mixer input  
1: power level = min  
2: power level = min  
3: power level = min × 2  
4: power level = min × 2  
5: power level = min × 3  
6: power level = min × 3  
7: power level = min × 4  
Rev. C | Page 102 of 112  
 
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 110. 0x322: CHIP_SHUTDOWN  
Bit  
[7:1]  
[0]  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
Reserved  
0
0
CHIP_SHTDN_REQ  
WUC chip-state control flag.  
0: remain in active state.  
1: invoke chip shutdown. CS must also be high to initiate a shutdown.  
Table 111. 0x324: POWERDOWN_RX  
Bit  
[7:5]  
[4]  
Name  
R/W Reset  
Description  
Reserved  
ADC_PD_N  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
1: ADC enabled  
0: ADC disabled  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
[0]  
RSSI_PD_N  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
1: RSSI enabled  
0: RSSI disabled  
RXBBFILT_PD_N  
RXMIXER_PD_N  
LNA_PD_N  
1: IF filter enabled  
0: IF filter disabled  
1: mixer enabled  
0: mixer disabled  
1: LNA enabled  
0: LNA disabled  
Table 112. 0x325: POWERDOWN_AUX  
Bit  
[7:2]  
[1]  
Name  
R/W Reset  
Description  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
TEMPMON_PD_EN  
1: enable  
0: disable temperature monitor  
[0]  
BATTMON_PD_EN  
R/W  
0
1: enable  
0: disable battery monitor  
Table 113. 0x327: ADC_READBACK_HIGH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:6]  
[5:0]  
Reserved  
R
0
0
ADC_READBACK[7:2]  
R
ADC readback of MSBs  
Table 114. 0x328: ADC_READBACK_LOW  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R
Reset  
Description  
[7:6]  
[5:0]  
ADC_READBACK[1:0]  
Reserved  
0
0
ADC readback of LSBs  
R
Table 115. 0x32D: BATTERY_MONITOR_THRESHOLD_VOLTAGE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:5]  
[4:0]  
Reserved  
0
0
BATTMON_VOLTAGE  
The battery monitor threshold voltage sets the alarm level for the battery  
monitor. The alarm is raised by the interrupt.  
Battery monitor trip voltage, VTRIP = 1.7 V + 62 mV × BATTMON_VOLTAGE.  
Table 116. 0x32E: EXT_UC_CLK_DIVIDE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
Reserved  
0
4
EXT_UC_CLK_DIVIDE  
Optional output clock frequency on XOSC32KP_GP5_ATB1.  
Output frequency = XTAL/EXT_UC_CLK_DIVIDE.  
To disable, set EXT_UC_CLK_DIVIDE = 0.  
Rev. C | Page 103 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 117. 0x32F: AGC_CLK_DIVIDE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0]  
AGC_CLOCK_DIVIDE R/W  
40  
AGC clock divider for 2FSK/GFSK/MSK/GMSK mode. The AGC rate is (26 MHz/(16 ×  
AGC_CLK_DIVIDE)).  
Table 118. 0x336: INTERRUPT_SOURCE_0  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7]  
INTERRUPT_NUM_WAKEUPS  
R/W  
0
Asserted when the number of WUC wake-ups  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS[15:0]) has reached the threshold  
(NUMBER_OF_WAKEUPS_IRQ_THRESHOLD[15:0])  
[6]  
[5]  
INTERRUPT_SWM_RSSI_DET  
INTERRUPT_AES_DONE  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
Asserted when the measured RSSI during smart wake mode has  
exceeded the RSSI threshold value (SWM_RSSI_THRESH, Address 0x108)  
Asserted when an AES encryption or decryption command is complete;  
available only when the AES firmware module has been loaded to the  
ADF7023 program RAM  
[4]  
[3]  
INTERRUPT_TX_EOF  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
Asserted when a packet has finished transmitting (packet mode only)  
INTERRUPT_ADDRESS_MATCH  
Asserted when a received packet has a valid address match (packet  
mode only)  
[2]  
[1]  
INTERRUPT_CRC_CORRECT  
INTERRUPT_SYNC_DETECT  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
Asserted when a received packet has the correct CRC (packet mode only)  
Asserted when a qualified sync word has been detected in the received  
packet  
[0]  
INTERRUPT_PREAMBLE_DETECT R/W  
0
Asserted when a qualified preamble has been detected in the received  
packet  
Table 119. 0x337: INTERRUPT_SOURCE_1  
Bit  
[7]  
[6]  
[5]  
[4]  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
[0]  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Description  
BATTERY_ALARM  
CMD_READY  
Unused  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Battery voltage dropped below the user-set threshold value.  
Communications processor ready to accept a new command.  
Wake-up timer has timed out.  
WUC_TIMEOUT  
Unused  
Unused  
SPI_READY  
CMD_FINISHED  
SPI ready for access.  
Command has finished.  
Table 120. 0x338: CALIBRATION_CONTROL  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Description  
[7:2] Reserved  
0
[1]  
[0]  
SYNTH_CAL_EN  
RXBB_CAL_EN  
0
1: enable the synthesizer calibration state machine.  
0: disable the synthesizer calibration state machine.  
1: enable receiver baseband filter (RXBB) calibration.  
0: disable receiver baseband filter (RXBB) calibration.  
R/W  
0
Table 121. 0x339: CALIBRATION_STATUS  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset Description  
[7:3] Reserved  
R
0
0
[2]  
[1]  
PA_RAMP_FINISHED  
R
SYNTH_CAL_READY  
R
0
1: synthesizer calibration finished successfully.  
0: synthesizer calibration in progress.  
[0]  
RXBB_CAL_READY  
R
0
Receive IF filter calibration.  
1: complete.  
0: in progress (valid while RXBB_CAL_EN = 1).  
Rev. C | Page 104 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 122. 0x345: RXBB_CAL_CALWRD_READBACK  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset Description  
[5:0] RXBB_CAL_CALWRD  
R
0
RXBB reference oscillator calibration word; valid after RXBB calibration cycle  
has been completed.  
Table 123. 0x346: RXBB_CAL_CALWRD_OVERWRITE  
Bit  
[6:1]  
[0]  
Name  
R/W  
RW  
Reset Description  
RXBB_CAL_DCALWRD_OVWRT_IN  
RXBB_CAL_DCALWRD_OVWRT_EN RW  
0
0
RXBB reference oscillator calibration overwrite word  
1: enable RXBB reference oscillator calibration word overwrite mode  
0: disable RXBB reference oscillator calibration word overwrite mode  
Table 124. 0x34F: RCOSC_CAL_READBACK_HIGH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0] RCOSC_CAL_READBACK[15:8]  
R
0x0  
Fine RC oscillator calibration result, Bits[15:8]  
Table 125. 0x350: RCOSC_CAL_READBACK_LOW  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0] RCOSC_CAL_READBACK[7:0]  
R
0x0  
Fine RC oscillator calibration result, Bits[7:0]  
Table 126. 0x359: ADC_CONFIG_LOW  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Description  
[7:4]  
[3:2]  
Reserved  
0
0
Set to 0.  
ADC_REF_CHSEL  
0: RSSI (default).  
1: external AIN  
2: temperature sensor  
3: unused  
[1:0]  
ADC_REFERENCE_CONTROL  
R/W  
0
The following reference values are valid for a 3 V supply:  
0: 1.85 V (default)  
1: 1.95 V  
2: 1.75 V  
3: 1.65 V  
Table 127. 0x35A: ADC_CONFIG_HIGH  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7]  
Reserved  
0
0
[6:5]  
FILTERED_ADC_MODE  
Filtering modes.  
00: normal operation (no filter).  
01: unfiltered AGC loop, filtered readback (updated upon MCR read).  
10: unfiltered AGC loop, filtered readback (update at AGC clock rate).  
11: filtered AGC loop, filtered readback.  
[4]  
ADC_EXT_REF_ENB  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
1
1
Bring low to power down the ADC reference.  
Set to 1.  
[3:0]  
Table 128. 0x35B: AGC_OOK_CONTROL  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[5:3]  
OOK_AGC_CLK_TRK  
R/W  
2
AGC update rate during tracking phase  
F
MAN  
AGC Update Rate =  
2(OOK_AGE_CLK_TRK + 1)  
where FMAN= the Manchester symbol rate. Manchester encoding is  
recommended for OOK; OOK_AGC_CLK_TRK must be ≥  
OOK_AGC_CLK_ACQ.  
Rev. C | Page 105 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Bit  
Name  
OOK_AGC_CLK_ACQ  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[2:0]  
R/W  
1
AGC update rate during acquisition phase.  
F
MAN  
AGC Update Rate =  
2(OOK_AGE_CLK_ACQ +1)  
where FMAN = the Manchester symbol rate. Manchester encoding is  
recommended for OOK; OOK_AGC_CLK_TRK must be ≥  
OOK_AGC_CLK_ACQ.  
Table 129. 0x35C: AGC_CONFIG  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:6]  
[5:4]  
[3:2]  
[1]  
LNA_GAIN_CHANGE_ORDER  
MIXER_GAIN_CHANGE_ORDER  
FILTER_GAIN_CHANGE_ORDER  
ALLOW_EXTRA_LO_LNA_GAIN  
DISALLOW_MAX_GAIN  
2
1
3
0
0
LNA gain change order  
Mixer gain change order  
Filter gain change order  
Allow extra low LNA gain setting  
Disallow maximum AGC gain setting  
[0]  
Table 130. 0x35D: AGC_MODE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7]  
Reserved  
0
0
[6:5]  
AGC_OPERATION_MCR  
0: free-running AGC  
1: manual AGC  
2: hold AGC  
3: lock AGC after preamble  
[4:3]  
LNA_GAIN  
R/W  
0
0: low  
1: medium  
2: high  
3: reserved  
[2]  
MIXER_GAIN  
FILTER_GAIN  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0: low  
1: high  
[1:0]  
0: low  
1: medium  
2: high  
3: reserved  
Table 131. 0x35E: AGC_LOW_THRESHOLD  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0]  
AGC_LOW_THRESHOLD  
R/W  
55  
AGC low threshold  
Table 132. 0x35F: AGC_HIGH_THRESHOLD  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0]  
AGC_HIGH_THRESHOLD  
R/W  
105  
AGC high threshold  
Table 133. 0x360: AGC_GAIN_STATUS  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R
Reset  
Description  
[7:5]  
[4:3]  
Reserved  
0
0
LNA_GAIN_READBACK  
R
0: low  
1: medium  
2: high  
3: reserved  
[2]  
MIXER_GAIN_READBACK  
FILTER_GAIN_READBACK  
R
R
0
0
0: low  
1: high  
[1:0]  
0: low  
1: medium  
2: high  
3: reserved  
Rev. C | Page 106 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
Table 134. 0x361: AGC_ADC_WORD  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R
Reset  
Description  
[7]  
Reserved  
0
0
Reserved.  
[6:0]  
AGC_ADC_WORD  
R
Auxiliary ADC sample word used when calculating RSSI of OOK  
signals. See the RSSI Method 4 section for more information.  
Table 135. 0x372: FREQUENCY_ERROR_READBACK  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset Description  
[7:0]  
FREQUENCY_ERROR_READBACK  
R
0 Frequency error between received signal frequency and receive channel  
frequency = FREQUENCY_ERROR_READBACK × 1 kHz. The  
FREQUENCY_ERROR_READBACK value is in twos complement format.  
Table 136. 0x3CB: VCO_BAND_OVRW_VAL  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset Description  
[7:0]  
VCO_BAND_OVRW_VAL R/W  
0
Overwrite value for the VCO frequency band; active when VCO_BAND_OVRW_EN = 1.  
Table 137. 0x3CC: VCO_AMPL_OVRW_VAL  
Bit  
Name  
R/W Reset Description  
[7:0]  
VCO_AMPL_OVRW_VAL R/W  
0
Overwrite value for the VCO bias current DAC; active when VCO_AMPL_OVRW_EN = 1.  
Table 138. 0x3CD: VCO_OVRW_EN  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:6]  
[5:2]  
[1]  
Reserved  
0
0
0
Reserved.  
VCO_Q_AMP_REF  
VCO_AMPL_OVRW_EN  
VCO amplitude level control reference DAC during Q phase.  
1: enable VCO bias current DAC overwrite.  
0: disable VCO bias current DAC overwrite.  
1: enable VCO frequency band overwrite.  
[0]  
VCO_BAND_OVRW_EN  
R/W  
0
0: disable VCO frequency band overwrite.  
Table 139. 0x3D0: VCO_CAL_CFG  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
Reserved  
VCO_CAL_CFG  
0
1
Reserved.  
VCO calibration state machine configuration. Set VCO_CAL_CFG = 0xF to bypass VCO  
calibration on the PHY_TX and PHY_RX transitions. Set VCO_CAL_CFG = 0x1 to enable the  
VCO calibrations on the transitions.  
Table 140. 0x3D2: OSC_CONFIG  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:6]  
[5:3]  
[2:0]  
Reserved  
0
0
0
Write 0.  
XOSC_CAP_DAC  
Reserved  
26 MHz crystal oscillator (XOSC26N) tuning capacitor control word.  
Write 0.  
Table 141. 0x3DA: VCO_BAND_READBACK  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0]  
VCO_BAND_READBACK  
R
0
Readback of the VCO bias current DAC after calibration  
Table 142. 0x3DB: VCO_AMPL_READBACK  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
VCO_AMPL_READBACK  
[7:0]  
R
0
Readback of the VCO bias current DAC after calibration  
Table 143. 0x3F8: ANALOG_TEST_BUS  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0]  
ANALOG_TEST_BUS  
R/W  
0
To enable analog RSSI on ATB3, set ANALOG_TEST_BUS = 0x64 in  
conjunction with setting RSSI_TSTMUX_SEL = 0x3.  
Rev. C | Page 107 of 112  
ADF7023  
Data Sheet  
Table 144. 0x3F9: RSSI_TSTMUX_SEL  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7]  
Reserved  
0
0
0
[6:2]  
[1:0]  
Reserved  
RSSI_TSTMUX_SEL  
To enable analog RSSI on ATB3, set RSSI_TSTMUX_SEL = 0x3 in conjunction  
with setting ANALOG_TEST_BUS = 0x64.  
Table 145. 0x3FA: GPIO_CONFIGURE  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:0]  
GPIO_CONFIGURE  
R/W  
0
0x00: default  
0x21: slicer output on GP5 (that is, bypass CDR)  
0x40: limiter outputs on GP0(Q) and GP1(I)  
0x41: filtered limiter outputs on GP0(Q) and GP1(I) and unfiltered limiter  
outputs on GP2(Q) and IRQ_GP3 (I)  
0x50: packet transmit data from communications processor on GP0  
0x53: PA ramp finished on GP0  
0xA0: Sport Mode 0  
0xA1: Sport Mode 1  
0xA2: Sport Mode 2  
0xA3: Sport Mode 3  
0xA4: Sport Mode 4  
0xA5: Sport Mode 5  
0xA6: Sport Mode 6  
0xA7: Sport Mode 7  
0xA8: Sport Mode 8  
0xC9: Test DAC output on GP0 (also must set TEST_DAC_GAIN)  
Table 146. 0x3FD: TEST_DAC_GAIN  
Bit  
Name  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset  
Description  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
Reserved  
0
4
Reserved.  
TEST_DAC_GAIN  
Set TEST_DAC_GAIN = 0 when using the test DAC.  
Rev. C | Page 108 of 112  
Data Sheet  
ADF7023  
OUTLINE DIMENSIONS  
5.10  
5.00 SQ  
4.90  
0.30  
0.25  
0.18  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
25  
32  
24  
1
0.50  
BSC  
3.45  
3.30 SQ  
3.15  
EXPOSED  
PAD  
17  
8
16  
9
0.50  
0.40  
0.30  
0.25 MIN  
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
FOR PROPER CONNECTION OF  
THE EXPOSED PAD, REFER TO  
THE PIN CONFIGURATION AND  
FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS  
0.80  
0.75  
0.70  
0.05 MAX  
0.02 NOM  
SECTION OF THIS DATA SHEET.  
COPLANARITY  
0.08  
0.20 REF  
SEATING  
PLANE  
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-220-WHHD.  
Figure 117. 32-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_WQ]  
5 mm × 5 mm Body, Very Very Thin Quad  
(CP-32-13)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
ORDERING GUIDE  
Package  
Option  
Model1  
Temperature Range  
Package Description  
ADF7023BCPZ  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
32-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_WQ]  
32-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_WQ]  
Evaluation Board (USB Motherboard)  
Evaluation Board (RF Daughterboard, 868 MHz/915 MHz, Separate Match)  
Evaluation Board (RF Daughterboard, 868 MHz/915 MHz, Combined Match)  
Evaluation Board (RF Daughterboard, 433 MHz, Separate Match)  
Evaluation Board (RF Daughterboard, 433 MHz, Combined Match)  
CP-32-13  
CP-32-13  
ADF7023BCPZ-RL  
EVAL-ADF7XXXMB3Z  
EVAL-ADF7023DB1Z  
EVAL-ADF7023DB2Z  
EVAL-ADF7023DB3Z  
EVAL-ADF7023DB4Z  
1 Z = RoHS Compliant Part.  
Rev. C | Page 109 of 112  
 
 
 
ADF7023  
NOTES  
Rev. C | Page 110 of 112  
Data Sheet  
NOTES  
ADF7023  
Rev. C | Page 111 of 112  
ADF7023  
NOTES  
©2010–2012 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and  
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
D08291-0-7/12(C)  
Rev. C | Page 112 of 112  

相关型号:

EVAL-ADF7023DB2Z

High Performance, Low Power, ISM Band FSK/GFSK/OOK/MSK/GMSK Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF7023DB3Z

High Performance, Low Power, ISM Band FSK/GFSK/OOK/MSK/GMSK Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF7023DB4Z

High Performance, Low Power, ISM Band FSK/GFSK/OOK/MSK/GMSK Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF7024DB1Z

EVAL BOARD TX 2.4GHZ ADF7024
ADI

EVAL-ADF7024DB2Z

Easy to Use, Low Power, Sub GHz, ISM/SRD, FSK/GFSK, Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF7024DB3Z

Easy to Use, Low Power, Sub GHz, ISM/SRD, FSK/GFSK, Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF7024DB4Z

DAUGHTER BOARD 431MHZ-435MHZ
ADI

EVAL-ADF7025DB1

High Performance ISM Band Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF7030DB7Z

High Performance, Low Power, 169 MHz ISM Band, Radio Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF70XXMB

High Performance ISM Band Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF70XXMB2

High Performance ISM Band Transceiver IC
ADI

EVAL-ADF70xxMBZ

High Performance, ISM Band, FSK/ASK Transceiver IC
ADI